670162

Icom IC-7600 Handleiding

33
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/180
Pagina verder
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER
i7600
i
FOREWORD
Thank you for making the IC-7600 your radio of
choice. We hope you agree with Icom’s philosophy of
“technology first.” Many hours of research and devel-
opment went into the design of your IC-7600.
FEATURES
❍  Ultimate receiver  performance: third-order inter-
cept (IP3) of +30 dBm (HF bands only)
❍  Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK modulator/demodu-
lator and direct PC keyboard connection capability 
for RTTY and PSK operations without a PC
❍  High resolution spectrum scope— center frequency 
and  fixed frequency modes,  plus  mini-scope dis-
plays
❍ USB connectors on front and rear panels
❍ Large LCD with LED backlight
IMPORTANT
READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CAREFULLY before attempting to operate the
transceiver.
SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This
manual contains important safety and operating
instructions for the IC-7600.
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS
WORD DEFINITION
RDANGER
P
ersonal death, serious injury or an
explosion may occur.
RWARNING
P
ersonal injury, fire hazard or electric
shock may occur.
CAUTION
Equ
ipment damage may occur.
NOTE
If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk
of personal injury, fire or electric shock.
Spurious signals may be received near the following
frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit
and does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
10.4923MHz, 24.576MHz
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
The transceiver comes with the following accessories.
Qty.
q Hand m
icrophone ............................................ 1
w DC power cable ............................................... 1
e Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ...................................... 1
r Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) .................................... 2
t 6.35 (d) mm plug ...............................................1
q
e
t
w
r
FCC INFORMATION
• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equip-
ment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of
Icom Incorporated (Japan) in the United States, the United King-
dom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trade-
marks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trade-
marks of their respective holders.
PRECAUTIONS
R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER
attach an antenna or internal antenna connector
during transmission. This may result in an electrical
shock or burn.
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver
with a headset or other audio accessories at high
volume levels. Hearing experts advise against continu-
ous high volume operation. If you experience a ringing
in your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use.
R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver
power OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an
abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom
dealer or distributor for advice.
CAUTION! NEVER put the transceiver in any
unstable place (such as on a slanted surface or
vibrated place). This may cause injury and/or damage
to the transceiver.
CAUTION! NEVER change the internal settings of
the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver perfor-
mance and/or damage to the transceiver.
In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits,
such as output power, idling current, etc., might
damage the expensive final devices.
The transceiver warranty does not cover any prob
-
lems caused by unauthor
ized internal adjustment.
CAUTION! NEVER apply AC power to the
[DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel. This
could cause a fire or damage the transceiver.
CAUTION! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC,
such as a 24 V battery, to the [DC13.8V] socket on
the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a fire or
damage the transceiver.
CAUTION!
NEVER let metal, wire or other objects
protrude into the transceiver or into connectors on the
rear panel. This may result in an electric shock.
CAUTION! NEVER block any cooling vents on
the top, rear or bottom of the transceiver.
CAUTION! NEVER expose the transceiver to
rain, snow or any liquids.
CAUTION!
NEVER install the transceiver in a
place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation
may be reduced, and the transceiver may be damaged.
CAUTION! NEVER operate or touch the trans-
ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric
shock or damage to the transceiver.
DO NOT use chemical agents such as benzine
or alcohol when cleaning the IC-7600, as they can
damage the transceiver’s surfaces.
DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don’t actu-
ally desire to transmit.
DO NOT use or place the transceiver in areas with
temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C
(+122°F).
DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty
environments or in direct sunlight.
DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or
putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may
overheat the transceiver.
Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-
tent use by ch
ildren.
BE CAREFUL!
If you use a linear amplifier, set the
transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear
amplifier’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear
amplifier will be damaged.
BE CAREFUL!
The rear panel will become hot when
operating the transceiver continuously for long peri-
ods of time.
Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional).
Other manufacturers’ microphones have different pin
assignments, and connection to the IC-7600 may
damage the transceiver or microphone.
The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections
that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a
malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of
LCD displays.
During maritime mobile operation, keep the trans
-
ce
iver and microphone as far away as possible from
the magnetic navigation compass to prevent errone-
ous indications.
Turn the transceiver power OFF and/or disconnect
the DC power cable when you will not use the trans-
ce
iver for long period of time.
For U.S.A. only
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device,
not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your
authority to operate this device under FCC regula-
tions.
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD .............................................................. i
IMPORTANT ...............................................................i
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS ............................................i
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES.......................................i
FCC INFORMATION .................................................. i
PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................... iii
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION...................................1−15
 ■ Front panel ........................................................1
 ■ Rear panel ....................................................... 11
 ■ LCD d
isplay ..................................................... 13
 ■ Screen menu arrangement ............................. 15
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ........16−24
 ■ Unpac
king ....................................................... 16
 ■ Selecting a location ......................................... 16
 ■ Grounding ....................................................... 16
 ■ Antenna connection ........................................ 16
 ■ Required connections ..................................... 17
D F
ront panel .................................................. 17
D Rear panel .................................................. 17
 ■ Adv
anced connections ....................................18
D F
ront panel .................................................. 18
D Rear panel— 1 ............................................ 18
D Rear panel— 2 ............................................ 19
 ■ USB connect
ion .............................................. 19
 ■ Power supply connections ............................... 20
 ■ External antenna tuner connection ................. 20
 ■ Linear amplifier connections ........................... 21
D Connect
ing the IC-PW1/EURO ................... 21
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier ......21
 ■
Transverter jack information ............................ 22
 ■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ...............22
D
FSK operation—
when connecting to [ACC 1] .......................
22
D AFSK oper
ation .......................................... 22
D When connecting to the [USB] connector ... 22
 ■ M
icrophone connector information .................. 23
 ■ Microphones .................................................... 23
D HM-36 ......................................................... 23
D
SM-50 (Option) ........................................... 23
 ■ Accessor
y connector information .................... 24
3 BASIC OPERATION .....................................25−37
 ■ Bef
ore first applying power .............................. 25
 ■ Applying power (CPU resetting) ...................... 25
 ■ Selecting VFO/memory mode ......................... 26
 ■ Main/Sub band selection ................................. 26
D Ma
in/Sub band switching ............................ 26
D Main/Sub band equalization ....................... 26
 ■ Select
ing an operating band ........................... 27
D Us
ing the band stacking registers ............... 27
 ■ F
requency setting ............................................ 28
D T
uning with the main dial ............................. 28
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad ....... 28
D About 5 MHz band operation
(USA version only) ......................................
29
D Qu
ick tuning step ........................................29
D Selecting “kHz” step .................................... 29
D Selecting 1 Hz step ..................................... 30
D Auto tuning step function ............................ 30
D
1
⁄4 tun
ing step function ...............................30
D Band edge w
arning beep ............................ 31
 ■ Oper
ating mode selection ............................... 32
 ■ Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity ...............33
 ■ Volume setting ................................................. 34
 ■ Meter indication selection ................................ 34
D Mult
i-function digital meter .......................... 34
D Meter type selection .................................... 35
 ■
Voice synthesizer operation ............................. 35
 ■ Basic transmit operation .................................. 36
D T
ransmitting ................................................. 36
D Microphone gain adjustment ....................... 36
D Drive gain adjustment ................................. 37
4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT ..........................38−89
 ■ Funct
ions for CW operation .............................38
D About CW re
verse mode ............................. 38
D About CW pitch control ............................... 38
D CW sidetone function .................................. 38
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation .............. 39
 ■ Electron
ic keyer functions ...............................40
D Memor
y keyer screen ................................. 41
D Editing a memory keyer .............................. 42
D Contest n
umber set mode .......................... 43
D Keyer set mode ........................................... 44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
 ■ RTTY (FSK) operation .....................................46
D About R
TTY reverse mode ......................... 47
D Twin peak filter ............................................ 47
D
Functions for the RTTY decoder indication
.. 48
D Setting the decoder threshold level .............48
D RTTY memory transmission .......................49
D Automatic transmission/reception setting ...49
D Editing RTTY memory ................................ 50
D R
TTY decode set mode .............................. 51
D Data saving ................................................. 53
 ■ PSK oper
ation ................................................. 54
D About BPSK and QPSK modes .................. 55
D Funct
ions for the PSK decoder indication ... 56
D Setting the decoder threshold level .............56
D PSK memory transmission ......................... 57
D Automatic transmission/reception setting ...57
D Editing PSK memory ..................................58
D PSK decode set mode ................................ 59
D Data sa
ving ................................................. 61
 ■ Repeater oper
ation .........................................62
D Repeater access tone frequency sett
ing .... 62
 ■
Tone squelch operation ................................... 63
 ■ Data mode (AFSK) operation .......................... 64
 ■ Spectrum scope screen .................................. 65
D Center mode ............................................... 65
D F
ixed mode ................................................. 66
D Mini scope screen indication ....................... 67
D Scope set mode .......................................... 67
 ■ Preampl
ifier ..................................................... 72
 ■ Attenuator ........................................................ 72
 ■ RIT function ..................................................... 73
D RIT mon
itor function ................................... 73
 ■ A
GC function ................................................... 74
D Select
ing the preset value ..........................74
D
Setting the AGC time constant preset value
.. 74
 ■
Twin PBT operation ......................................... 75
 ■ IF filter selection .............................................. 76
D IF filter select
ion .......................................... 76
D Filter passband width setting
(except FM mode) ....................................... 76
D Roofing filter selection ................................ 77
D DSP filter shape .......................................... 77
D Filter shape set mode ................................. 78
 ■ Dualw
atch operation........................................79
 ■ Noise blanker .................................................. 81
D NB set mode ............................................... 81
 ■ Noise reduction ............................................... 82
 ■ Dial lock function ............................................. 82
 ■ Notch function ................................................. 83
 ■ Auto tune function ........................................... 83
 ■ VOX function .................................................... 84
D Us
ing the VOX function ............................... 84
D Adjusting the VOX function ......................... 84
 ■ Break-
in function ............................................. 85
D Sem
i break-in operation .............................. 85
D Full break-
in operation ................................ 85
 ■ Speech compressor ........................................ 86
 ■
Transmit filter width setting .............................. 86
 ■ ∂TX function ................................................... 87
D ∂TX mon
itor function .................................. 87
 ■ Mon
itor function ............................................... 87
 ■ Split frequency operation ................................ 88
 ■ Quick split function .......................................... 89
D
Split lock function ........................................ 89
5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS ...............90−98
 ■ About d
igital voice recorder ............................. 90
 ■ Recording a received audio ............................ 91
D Bas
ic recording ...........................................91
D One-touch record
ing ...................................91
 ■ Pla
ying the recorded audio.............................. 92
D Bas
ic playing ...............................................92
D One-touch pla
ying ....................................... 92
 ■ Protect the recorded contents ......................... 93
 ■ Er
asing the recorded contents ........................ 93
 ■ Recording a message for transmit .................. 94
D Record
ing ................................................... 94
D Confir
ming a message for transmit ............. 94
 ■ Prog
ramming a memory name ........................ 95
 ■ Sending a recorded message ......................... 96
D T
ransmit level setting ................................... 96
 ■
Voice set mode ................................................ 97
 ■ Saving a voice message
into the USB-Memory ......................................98
D Sa
ving the received audio memory ............ 98
D Sa
ving the TX memory ............................... 98
iv
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 MEMORY OPERATION ..............................99−104
 ■ Memory channels ............................................ 99
 ■ Memor
y channel selection .............................. 99
D Us
ing the [∫]/[√] keys ................................ 99
D Using the keypad ........................................ 99
 ■ Memor
y list screen ........................................ 100
D
Selecting a memory channel
using the memory list screen .................... 100
D
Confirming programmed memory channels
.. 100
 ■ Memor
y channel programming ..................... 101
D Prog
ramming in VFO mode ...................... 101
D Programming in memory mode ................ 101
 ■ Frequency transfers ...................................... 102
D Transferring in VFO mode ........................ 102
D Transferring in memory mode ................... 102
 ■ Memory names ............................................. 103
D Ed
iting (programming) memory names .... 103
 ■ Memory clear
ing ............................................ 103
 ■ Memo pads ................................................... 104
D
Writing frequencies and operating modes
into memo pads ........................................
104
D
Calling up a frequency from a memo pad
.. 104
7 SCANS .....................................................105−111
 ■ Scan types .................................................... 105
 ■ Prepar
ation .................................................... 105
 ■ Scan set mode .............................................. 106
 ■ Programmed scan operation ......................... 107
 ■ ∂F scan operation ......................................... 107
 ■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan ........... 108
 ■ Memory scan operation ................................. 109
 ■ Select memory scan operation ...................... 109
 ■ Setting select memory channels ................... 110
D Sett
ing in scan screen .............................. 110
D Setting in memory list screen ................... 110
D Erasing the select scan setting ................. 110
 ■ Tone scan ...................................................... 111
8
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION .............112−114
 ■ A
utomatic antenna selection ......................... 112
 ■ Antenna tuner operation ................................ 113
D
Tuner operation ......................................... 113
D Manual tuning ........................................... 113
■ Opt
ional external tuner operation .................. 114
9 CLOCK AND TIMERS ..............................115−117
 ■ Clock set mode ............................................. 115
 ■ Da
ily timer setting .......................................... 116
 ■ Setting sleep timer ........................................ 117
 ■ Timer operation ............................................. 117
10 SET MODE ...............................................118−143
 ■ Set mode descri
ption .................................... 118
D Set mode oper
ation .................................. 118
D Screen arr
angement ................................. 119
 ■ Level set mode .............................................. 120
 ■ ACC set mode ............................................... 124
 ■ D
isplay set mode ........................................... 126
 ■ Others set mode ............................................ 128
 ■ USB-Memory set menu ................................. 136
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement .....136
 ■ File loading .................................................... 137
D Load opt
ion set mode ............................... 138
 ■ F
ile saving ..................................................... 139
D Sa
ve option set mode ...............................140
 ■ Chang
ing a file name .................................... 141
 ■ Deleting a file ............................................... 142
 ■ Unmounting USB-Memory ............................ 142
 ■ Formatting the USB-Memory ........................ 143
11 MAINTENANCE .......................................144−150
 ■
Troubleshooting .............................................144
D T
ransceiver power ..................................... 144
D Transmit and receive ................................. 144
D Scanning ................................................... 145
D Display ...................................................... 145
D Format USB-Memory ................................ 145
 ■ Ma
in dial brake adjustment ........................... 145
 ■ SWR reading ................................................. 146
 ■ Screen type and font selections .................... 146
 ■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ............. 147
 ■ Opening the transceiver’s case ..................... 148
 ■ Clock backup battery replacement ................ 148
 ■ Fuse replacement ......................................... 149
D DC po
wer cable fuse replacement ............ 149
D Circuitry fuse replacement ........................ 149
 ■ Resett
ing the CPU ........................................ 149
 ■ About protection indications .......................... 150
 ■ Screen saver function .................................... 150
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12 CONTROL COMMAND ............................151−159
 ■ Remote jac
k (CI-V) information ..................... 151
D CI-V connect
ion example .......................... 151
D Data format ............................................... 151
D Command table ........................................ 152
D Data content description ........................... 157
13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS ..........160−161
 ■ General ......................................................... 160
 ■
Transmitter ..................................................... 160
 ■ Receiver ........................................................ 160
 ■ Antenna tuner ................................................ 160
 ■ Options .......................................................... 161
14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ...................162−165
 ■ General ......................................................... 162
 ■ Caut
ion .......................................................... 162
 ■ Preparation .................................................... 163
D F
irmware and firm utility ............................ 163
D File downloading ....................................... 163
 ■ F
irmware update ........................................... 164
15 CE .............................................................166−167
vi
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
q POWER SWITCH [POWER•TIMER] (p. 30)
  While transceiver’s power is OFF:
➥ Push to turn the transceiver power ON.
• Turn the optional DC power supply ON in advance.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when
powered ON.
  While transceiver’s power is ON:
➥ Push momentarily to toggle the timer function
ON and OFF. (p. 117)
• The timer indicator appears when the timer function
is ON. (If the transceiver’s power is OFF, the
indicator on this switch lights red.)
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the transceiver
power OFF.
w TRANSMIT SWITCH [TRANSMIT]
Selects tr
ansmit or receive.
• The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the
[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open.
e HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]
Accepts standard stereo headphones (impedance:
8 to 16 ø).
• Output power: 5 mW with an 8 ø load.
• When headphones are connected, the internal speaker
or connected external speaker does not function.
r ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY]
Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic
keyer for CW operation. (p. 17)
• You can select internal electronic keyer, bug-key or
straight key operation in keyer set mode screen. (p. 44)
• A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See
[KEY] on p. 12.
•
Keyer polarity (dot and dash) can be reversed in keyer
set mode screen. (p. 45)
•
A 4-channel memory keyer is available for your
convenience. (p. 41)
(dot)
(com)
(dash)
t USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR
(A type) [USB] (A) (p. 19)
➥ Insert USB-Memory* for both reading/storing a
wide variety of the transceiver’s information and
data.
• The indicator above the connector lights or blinks
when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory
data.
• Unmount operation should be performed before
removing the USB-Memory* (p.142).
➥ Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK
operations, etc.
• Only USB keyboards* are supported.
*: USB-Memory and USB keyboard are not supplied
by Icom.
■ Front panel
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
q
w
e
y
t
r
u i o !0
1
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]
Accepts the supplied or optional microphone.
• See p. 161 for appropriate microphones.
• See p. 23 for microphone connector information.
u MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC GAIN] (p. 36)
Adjusts microphone input gain.
• The transmit audio tone in SSB, AM and FM modes
can be adjusted independently in level set mode.
(p. 121)
✔ How to set the microphone gain.
Set the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC meter
o
ccasionally moves up-scale during normal voice
transmission in SSB, AM or FM mode.
MIC GAIN
Recommended level for
an Icom microphone
Increases
Decreases
Push
i AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 34)
Varies the audio output level of the speaker or
headphones.
o RF POWER CONTROL [RF POWER] (p. 36)
Continuously varies the RF output power from
minimum (2 W*) to maximum (100 W*).
*AM mode: 1 W to 30 W
Increases
max. 100 W
(30 W for AM)
Decreases
min. 2 W
(1 W for AM)
Push
!0 RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL
[RF/SQL] (outer control; p. 33)
Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level.
The squelch removes noise output from the speaker
(closed condition) when no signal is received.
• The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also
available for other modes.
• 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for any setting
of the [RF/SQL] control.
• T
he control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in
SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM and
FM) or squelch control (RF gain is fixed at maximum)
in set mode as follows. (p. 128)
MODE
SET MODE SETTING
AUTO SQL RF GAIN + SQL
SSB, CW
RTTY/PSK
RF GAIN SQL RF GAIN + SQL
AM, FM SQL SQL RF GAIN + SQL
• When setting as RF gain/squelch control
Maximum
RF gain
S-meter
squelch
Noise squelch (FM mode)
Squelch is
open.
RF gain
adjustable
range
Recommended level
• When functioning as RF gain control
(Squelch is fixed open; SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK only)
Minimum RF gain
Adjustable
range
Maximum
RF gain
• When functioning as squelch control
(RF gain is fixed at maximum.)
Squelch is
open.
S-meter
squelch
S-meter squelch
threshold
Noise squelch
threshold
(FM mode)
Shallow Deep
Noise squelch (FM mode)
While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be
heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.
2
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
!1 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL
[BK-IN DELAY] (p. 85)
Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay
time for CW semi-break-in operations.
Push
Short delay for
high speed
keying (2 dots)
Long delay for
slow speed
keying (13 dots)
!2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL
[KEY SPEED] (p. 85)
Adjusts keying speed for the internal electronic CW
keyer from 6 wpm (min.) to 48 wpm (max.).
Push
Slow
(6 wpm)
Fast
(48 wpm)
!3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES
Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD
display to the right of these switches.
• Functions vary depending on the operating condition.
MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH)
ANT SWITCH (ANT)
➥ Selects the antenna connector be-
tween ANT1 and ANT2 when pushed.
(p. 112)
➥ Turns the [RX ANT] (receive antenna)
ON and OFF when pushed and held
for 1 sec.
• When the receive antenna is activated,
the antenna connected to the [ANT1] or
[ANT2]
is used for transmitting only.
When a transverter is in use, this [ANT]
does not function and ‘TRV’ appears.
MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH)
METER SWITCH (METER) (p. 34)
➥ Selects RF power (Po), SWR, ALC,
COMP, Vd or Id metering during trans-
mit.
➥ Switches the multi-function digital
meter ON and OFF when pushed and
held for 1 sec.
■ F
ront panel (continued)
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
M.SCOPE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
!1 !2
!3
3
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH)
P.AMP SWITCH (P.AMP) (p. 72)
➥ Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps
or bypasses them.
• “P. AMP1” activates 10 dB preamp.
• “ P. AMP2” activates 16 dB high-gain pre-
amp.
• “P. AMP OFF” can also be selected.
➥ Turns the preamp function OFF when
pushed and held for 1 sec.
✔ What is the preamp?
T
he preamp amplifies signals in the front end to
improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P. AMP1”
or “P. AMP2” when receiving weak signals.
MF4 (MULTI-FUNCTION 4 SWITCH)
ATT SWITCH (ATT) (p
. 72)
➥ Selects 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenua-
tor when pushed.
• “ATT OFF” can also be selected.
➥ Turns the attenuator function OFF
when pushed and held for 1 sec.
✔ What is the attenuator?
T
he attenuator prevents a desired signal from
being distorted when very strong signals are near
the desired frequency, or when very strong electro-
m
agnetic fields, such as from a broadcasting sta-
tion, are near your location.
MF5 (MULTI-FUNCTION 5 SWITCH)
AGC SWITCH (AGC) (p. 74)
➥ Activates and selects fast, middle
or slow AGC time constant when
pushed.
• In FM mode, only “FAST” is available.
➥ Enters the AGC set mode when
pushed and held for 1 sec.
AGC time constant can be set be-
tween 0.1 to 8.0 sec. (depends on
mode)
, or turned OFF. When AGC is
“OFF,” the S-meter does not function.
✔ What is the AGC?
T
he AGC controls receiver gain to produce a con-
s
tant audio output level, even when the received
signal strength varies dramatically. Select “FAST”
for tuning and then select “MID” or “SLOW” de-
pending on the receiving condition.
MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH)
VOX SWITCH (VOX) (p. 84)
➥ Push to turn the VOX function ON and
OFF during SSB, AM and FM mode
operation.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter VOX
set mode.
✔ What is the VOX function?
T
he VOX function (voice operated transmission)
activates transmission without pushing the trans-
mit
switch or PTT switch when you speak into the
microphone; then automatically returns to receive
when you stop speaking.
BK-IN SWITCH (BK-IN) (p. 85)
➥ Selects semi break-in, full break-in
operation, or turns the break-in opera-
tion OFF when pushed in CW mode.
✔ What is the break-in function?
T
he break-in function switches transmit and re-
ce
ive with CW keying. Full break-in function (QSK)
can monitor the receive signal during keying.
MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH)
COMP SWITCH (COMP) (p. 86)
➥ Turns the speech compressor ON and
OFF in SSB mode.
➥ Switches the narrow, middle or wide
compression when pushed and held
for 1 sec.
✔ What is the speech compressor?
The speech compressor compresses the trans-
mit
ter audio input to increase the average audio
output level, to increase talk power. This function is
effective for long-distance communication or when
propagation conditions are poor.
1
⁄
4
SWITCH (
1
⁄
4
) (p. 30)
➥ Turns the
1
⁄4 speed tuning function
ON and OFF in SSB data, CW, RTTY
and PSK modes.
•
1
⁄4 function sets dial rotation to
1
⁄4 of
normal speed for fine tuning.
TONE SWITCH (TONE) (pgs. 62, 63)
➥ Switches between the tone encoder,
tone squelch function and no-tone op-
eration when pushed in FM mode.
➥ Enters the tone set mode when
pushed and held for 1 sec. in FM
mode.
4
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
!4 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (p. 82)
Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON and OFF.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the func-
tion is activated.
!5 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]
(outer control; p. 82)
Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the
noise reduction function is in use. Set for maximum
readability.
• To use this control, push [NR] (!4) in advance.
Decreases
Increases
!6 MONITOR SWITCH [MONITOR] (p. 87)
Monitors your transmitted IF signal.
• The CW sidetone functions regardless of the [MONI-
TOR] switch setting in CW mode.
• The indicator on this switch lights green while the func-
t
ion is activated.
!7 ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH [TUNER] (p. 113)
➥ Turns the internal antenna tuner ON and OFF
(bypass) when pushed momentarily.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the
tuner is turned ON, goes off when tuner is turned
OFF (bypassed).
➥ Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed
and held for 1 sec.
• The indicator on this switch blinks red during manual
tuning.
• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning
circuit is bypassed automatically after 20 sec.
!8 BALANCE CONTROL [BAL] (inner control; p. 79)
Adjusts the audio output balance between main
and sub readout frequencies while in dualwatch.
Increases main
readout gain
Increases sub
readout gain
!9 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (p. 81)
➥ Switches the noise blanker ON and OFF when
pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type
noise such as that generated by automobile
ignition systems. This function cannot be used
in FM mode, and is not effective for non-pulse-
type noise.
• The indicator on this switch lights green while the
function is activated.
 ➥ Enters the noise blanker level set mode when
pushed and held for 1 sec.
@0 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1] to [F-6]
Push to select the function indicated in the LCD
display above these switches.
• Functions vary depending on the operating condition.
■ Front panel (continued)
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
M.SCOPE
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
!4!5!6!7
!9
!8
@0 @1 @2 @3 @7 @8 @9@6@5@4
5
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
@1 MODE SWITCHES
Selects the desired mode. (p. 32)
• Announces the selected mode via the speech synthe-
sizer. (p. 35)
[SSB]
➥ Selects USB and LSB modes alternately when
pushed.
➥ Selects SSB data mode (USB-D, LSB-D) when
pushed and held for 1 sec. in SSB mode.
• In SSB data mode, push to return to SSB mode.
 ➥ Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held
for 1 sec. in SSB data mode.
[CW]
Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse) modes alter-
nately when pushed.
[RTTY/PSK]
➥
Selects RTTY and PSK modes alternately when
pushed.
 ➥ Switches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY reverse)
mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in RTTY
mode.
 ➥ Switches PSK and PSK-R (PSK reverse) mode
when pushed and held for 1 sec. in PSK mode.
[AM/FM]
➥ Selects AM and FM modes alter
nately.
➥ Selects AM or FM data mode (AM-D/FM-D)
when pushed and held for 1 sec. in AM or FM
mode, respectively.
• In AM or FM data mode, push to return to AM or
FM mode, respectively.
 ➥ Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held
for 1 sec. in AM or FM data mode.
@2 FIL
TER SWITCH [FILTER] (p. 76)
➥ Push to select one of 3 IF filter settings.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to display the filter set
screen.
@3 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET]
➥
Push to exit, or return to the previous screen in-
dication during spectrum scope, memory, scan
or set mode screen display.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to display the set mode
menu screen.
@4
VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC]
(p. 91)
➥ Push to record the previous received signal for
the preset time period.
• The preset time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. 97)
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to record the received
signal until the recording is cancelled.
• Push this switch momentarily to stop recording.
• The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audio.
@5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH [PLAY]
(p. 92)
➥ Push to playback the previously recorded audio
for the preset time period.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to playback all of the
previously recorded audio.
@6
AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTO TUNE]
(p. 83)
Turns the automatic tuning function ON and OFF in
CW and AM modes.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-
tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
@7 MAIN DIAL
Changes the displayed frequency, selects set
mode setting, etc.
@8 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH [SPEECH/LOCK]
➥
Push to announce the S-meter indication, the
displayed frequency and the operating mode.
(p. 35)
• The parameters to be announced can be selected in
the others set mode. (p. 131)
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dial lock
function ON and OFF. (p. 82)
• The dial lock function electronically locks the main
dial.
• The lock indicator lights while the dial lock function
is activated.
NOTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] switch operation
to activate the voice synthesizer or the dial lock
functions can be replaced in others set mode.
(p. 131)
@9 RIT/∂TX CONTROL [RIT/∂TX] (pgs. 73, 87)
Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency with-
out changing the transmit and/or receive frequency
shown on the main VFO while the RIT and/or ∂TX
functions are/is ON.
• Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency,
or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the
frequency. The RIT or ∂TX funct
ions must be ON.
• The shift frequency range is ±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps
(or ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).
Low shift
High shift
6
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
#0 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX]
Lights red while transmitting.
#1 RECEIVE INDICA
TOR [RX]
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the
squelch is open.
#2
LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 13)
Shows the operating frequency, function switch
menus, spectrum scope screen, memory list
screen, set mode settings, etc.
#3 SPLIT OPERA
TION INDICATOR [SPLIT] (p. 88)
Lights during split frequency operation.
#4 MAIN/SUB CHANGE SWITCH [CHANGE]
➥
Switches the frequency and selected memory
channel between main and sub readouts when
pushed.
• Switches between transmit frequency and receive
frequency when the split frequency function is ON.
(p. 88)
➥ Equalizes the sub readout frequency to the
main readout frequency when pushed and held
for 1 sec.
#5
LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 82)
Lights when the dial lock function is activated.
#6 DU
ALWATCH SWITCH [DUALWATCH] (p. 79)
➥ Push to turn the dualwatch function ON and
OFF.
• “ ” appears when the dualwatch function
is in use.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dualwatch
function ON and equalizes the sub readout fre-
quency to the main readout. (Quick dualwatch
function)
• The quick dualwatch function can be turned OFF in
others set mode. (p. 128)
#7 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 88)
➥ Push to turn the split function ON and OFF.
• “ ” appears when the split function is in
use.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to activate the quick
split function.
• The split function ON and equalize the sub readout
frequency to the main readout and sets the sub
readout for frequency input in non-FM modes. (p. 89)
• The offset frequency is shifted from the selected
VFO frequency in FM mode. (p. 129)
• The tone encoder function is turned ON in FM
mode.
• The quick split function can be turned OFF in others
set mode. (p. 129)
#8 KEYPAD
➥ Pushing a key selects the operating band. (p. 27)
• [GEN •] selects the general coverage band.
➥ Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up
other stacked frequencies in the band.
(p. 27)
• Icom’s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-
quencies in each band.
➥ After pushing [F-INP ENT], push a key on the
keypad to enter a numeric frequency. After en-
tering, push [F-INP ENT] to select the desired
frequency directly
(p. 28)
• e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz;
Push [F-INP ENT] [1] [4] [•] [1] [9] [5] [F-INP ENT].
➥ After pushing [F-INP ENT], push a key on the
keypad to enter a memory channel. After enter-
ing, push [∫]/[√] to select the desired memory
channel directly.
(p. 99)
■ Front panel (continued)
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
M.SCOPE
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
$2
$3
#0 #5#4 #6 #7 #8 #9
$0
#3#2#1
$1
$4$5
7
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
#9 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT]
(p. 75)
Adjusts the receiver’s IF filter passband width via
the DSP.
• Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in
the multi-function display.
• Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT
sett
ings.
• Adjustment range is set to half of the IF filter passband
width. 25 Hz steps and 100 Hz steps are available.
✔ What is the PBT control?
The PBT function electronically modifies the IF pass-
band width to reject interference. This transceiver uses
the DSP circuit for the PBT function.
PBT2
PBT1
– +
Low cutHigh cut Center
$0 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT-CLR] (p. 75)
Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settings.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when PBT is in
use.
$1 NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (p. 83)
➥ Switches the notch function between auto, man-
ual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.
• Either auto or manual notch function can be deacti-
vated in others set mode. (p. 132)
➥ Turns the manual notch function ON and OFF
when pushed in CW, RTTY and PSK mode.
➥ Turns the auto notch function ON and OFF
when pushed in FM mode.
• “ ” appears when manual notch is in use.
• “
” appears when auto notch is in use.
• No indicator appears when the notch function is not
in use.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to switch the manual
notch characteristics from wide, middle and nar-
row when manual notch function is activated.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the
function is activated.
✔ What is the notch function?
The notch function is a narrow filter that eliminates un-
wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de-
s
ired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts
the notch frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted
tones.
$2 ∂TX SWITCH [∂TX] (p. 87)
➥
Push to turn the ∂TX function ON and OFF.
• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the ∂TX frequency.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the ∂TX shift
frequency to the operating frequency.
✔ What is the ∂TX function?
∂TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-
ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency
operation in CW, etc.
$3 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pgs. 73, 87)
Push or push and hold for 1 sec.* to clear the RIT/
∂TX shift frequency.
* Depending on the quick RIT/∂TX clear function setting
(p. 132).
$4 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH
[XFC]
➥ Monitors the transmit frequency (including ∂TX
frequency offset)
when pushed and held during
split frequency operation. (p. 88)
• While pushing and holding this switch, the transmit
frequency can be changed with the main dial, key-
pad, memo pad or [∫]/[√] s
witches.
• When the split lock function is turned ON, pushing
[XFC] cancels the dial lock function. (pgs. 88, 129)
➥ Monitors the operating frequency directly
when pushed and held when the RIT function
is turned ON. (RIT is temporarily cancelled.)
(p. 73)
$5
MAIN/SUB•M.SCOPE SWITCH
[MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE]
➥ Push to select access to the main or sub read-
out. (p. 26)
• The selected readout frequency is displayed clearly.
The sub readout functions only during split operation
or dualwatch.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the mini spec-
trum scope screen indication ON and OFF.
(p. 67)
• The mini spectrum scope screen can be indicated
with another screen, such as memory, set mode
screen, simultaneously.
8
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
$6 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES [∫]/[√] (p. 99)
➥
Push to select the desired memory channel.
• Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and
memory modes.
➥
Push to select the desired memory channel di-
rectly after pushing [F-INP ENT] and a memory
channel number.
$7 MEMOR
Y WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 101)
Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when
pushed and held for 1 sec.
• This function is available both in VFO and memory
modes.
$8 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH [MP-W] (p. 104)
Programs the displayed readout frequency and op-
er
ating mode into a memo pad.
• The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads.
• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10
in others set mode. (p. 132)
$9 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH [MP-R] (p. 104)
Each push calls up a frequency and operating
mode in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently
programmed frequencies and operating modes
can be recalled, starting from the most recent.
• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10
in others set mode. (p. 132)
%0 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO]
➥ Switches the selected readout operating mode
between the VFO and memory when pushed.
(pgs. 26, 99)
➥ Transfers the memory contents to VFO when
pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 102)
%1 Q
UICK TUNING SWITCH [TS]
➥ Turns the quick tuning step ON and OFF. (p. 29)
• While the quick tuning indicator, “Z,” is displayed
above the frequency indication, the frequency can
be changed in programmed kHz steps.
• 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are avail
-
ab
le for each operating mode independently.
➥ When the quick tuning step is ON, push and hold
for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning step set mode.
(p. 29)
➥ When the quick tuning step is OFF, push and
hold for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON
and OFF. (p. 30)
%2
AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER
SWITCH [APF/TPF]
During CW mode operation (p. 39)
➥ Push to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF.
• “ ” appears when audio peak filter is in use.
➥ When the audio peak filter is ON, push and hold
for 1 sec. to select the APF passband width
from WIDE, MID and NAR or from 320, 160 and
80 Hz depending on APF type setting (SOFT or
SHARP).
During RTTY mode operation (p. 47)
➥ Push to tur
n the twin peak filter ON and OFF.
• “ ” appears when twin peak filter is in use.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the
function is activated.
■ Front panel (continued)
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
M.SCOPE
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
$6
%2
$7 $8 $9 %0%1
%3
%4
%5
9
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
%3 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH]
(outer control; p. 38)
Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW
sidetone pitch without changing the operating fre-
quency.
Lower frequency
Higher frequency
%4 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]
(inner control; p. 83)
Varies the notch frequency of the manual notch
filter to reject an interfering signal while the manual
notch function is ON.
• Notch filter center frequency:
LSB/RTTY/PSK-R : –1040 Hz to +4060 Hz
USB/RTTY-R/PSK : –1060 Hz to +4040 Hz
CW : CW pitch freq. –2540 Hz to
CW p
itch freq. +2540 Hz
AM : –5100 Hz to +5100 Hz
Lower frequency
Higher frequency
%5 RIT SWITCH [RIT] (p. 73)
➥ Push to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.
• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the RIT frequency.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the RIT shift fre-
quency to the operating frequency.
✔ What is the RIT function?
The RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the receive
frequency without shifting the transmit frequency.
This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you off-fre-
q
uency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-
sounding voice characteristics, etc.
10
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Rear panel
1 2ANT
DC 13.8V
X-VERTER
RX-ANT
ACC
TUNER
IN OUT ALC SEND
KEY
1 2
METER
REMOTE
EXT
-
SP
q w re
tyo!0!1!2!7 !6 !5 !4 !3 i u
q GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 16)
Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent elec-
tri
cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.
w ANTENNA CONNECT
OR 1 [ANT1]
e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT2] (pgs. 17, 112)
Accept a 50 ø
antenna with a PL-259 plug connec-
tor.
When using an optional AH-4 HF/50 MHz AUTO-
MATIC ANTENNA TUNER
, connect it to the
[ANT1] connector. The internal antenna tuner
activates for [ANT2] and deactivates for [ANT1]
when connecting the AH-4.
r DC PO
WER SOCKET [DC 13.8V] (p. 20)
Accepts 13.8 V DC through the supplied DC power
cable.
Rear panel view
t
EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP]
(p. 18)
Connects an external speaker (4–8 ø),
if desired.
y
CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]
(pgs. 151, 18)
➥
Connects a PC via the optional CT-17 ci-v level
converter for external control of the trans-
ceiver.
➥ Used for transceive operation with another Icom
CI-V transceiver or receiver.
u USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR (B type)
[USB] (B)
Connect a USB cable to be used for the modula-
tion input (p. 124), the transceiver operation with
PC, the received audio and the decoded character
import to the PC.
CAUTION:
For Windows® XP/2000:
NEVER install the USB driver into the PC before
connecting the transceiver and PC using a USB
cable.
For Windows Vista™:
NEVER connect a PC using a USB cable until
the USB driver installation has been completed.
About the USB driver:
Icom HP (http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/
index.html) gives the USB driver and the installa-
t
ion guide download service.
The following items are required:
PC
•
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP/2000 or
Microsoft
®
Windows Vista™ installed
• With USB port
Other items
• USB cable (third party)
• PC software
About the modulation input:
Select “USB” in the ACC set mode item ‘DATA OFF
MOD,’ ‘DATA1 MOD,’ ‘DATA2 MOD’ or ‘DATA3 MOD.’
A
nd the modulation input level from USB jack can
be set in the ACC set mode item ‘USB MOD Level.’
(p. 124)
11
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
i METER JACK [METER] (p. 19)
Outputs a signal showing received signal strength,
transmit output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com-
p
ression, Vd or Id level for external meter indica-
tion.
o STRAIGHT KEY J
ACK [KEY] (p. 17)
Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer
output using a
1
⁄4 inch standard plug.
• [ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a
straight key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the
internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode. (p. 45)
(+)
(_)
!0 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2]
!1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1]
Enable connection of external equipment such as
a linear amplifier, an automatic antenna selector/
tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc.
• See p. 24 for socket information.
!2 TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. 18)
Accepts the control cable from an optional AH-4
HF/50 MHz AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.
!3 SEND CONTR
OL JACK [SEND] (p. 18)
Connects to ground when transmitting to control an
external unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplifier.
NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be
less than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC, 200 mA
with MOSFET switching).
!4 ALC INPUT J
ACK [ALC] (p. 18)
Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-
ear ampl
ifier.
!5 RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX
ANT– OUT]
!6 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT– IN]
Located between the transmit/receive switching
circuit and receiver’s RF stage.
Connects an external unit, such as preamplifier or
RF filter, using RCA connectors, if desired.
In this case, the antenna connector must be se-
lected as
“ANT 1/R” or “ANT 2/R.” (p. 112)
• When no external unit is connected, “ANT 1” or “ANT 2”
must be selected.
Transmitter
IN
[RX ANT]
OUT
Transmit/Receive
switching circuit
ANT
Receiver
!7 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]
(p. 18)
Exter
nal transverter input/output connector.
Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or
when the transverter function is in use. (p. 24)
12
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ LCD display
q t y u irew
o
!4
!3
!2
!1
e
w
!0
!6 !5
!2!3
!7
!5
!8
!0
!1
!9
@0 @2 @3@1
@4
q S/RF METER (pgs. 35, 126)
Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows
the relative output power, SWR, ALC, VD, ID or
compression levels while transmitting.
• A total of 3 meter types are available.
• Standard meter
• Edgewise meter
• Bar meter
w IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 76)
Shows the selected IF filter number.
e Q
UICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 29)
Appears when the quick tuning step function is in
use.
r BANDWIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75)
Shows the passband width of the IF filter.
t SHIFT FREQ
UENCY INDICATOR (p. 75)
Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter.
y P
ASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75)
Graphically displays the passband width for twin
PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-
er
ation.
u B
ANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR
Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is
selected during SSB, CW, RTTY or PSK operation.
i CLOCK READOUT
Sho
ws the current time.
Local and UTC time can be indicated at the same
time.
• Offset time period for UTC time can be set in time set
mode. (p. 115)
13
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
o RTTY TUNING INDICATOR
Shows the tuning condition in RTTY mode.
!0 MODE INDICA
TOR
Shows the selected mode.
!1 FREQ
UENCY READOUTS
Shows the operating frequency.
• Gray characters are used for not-selected readout.
!2 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS
➥
Shows the selected memory channel contents
in VFO mode.
➥ Shows the VFO contents in memory mode.
!3 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR
(p. 109)
Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as
a select memory channel.
!4 MUL
TI-FUNCTION SCREEN
Shows the screens for the multi-function digital
meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory
list, scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK de-
coder
, IF filter selection or set modes, etc.
!5 VFO/MEMOR
Y CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 26)
Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-
nel number.
!6 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE
Indicates the function of the LCD function switches
([F-1] to [F-6]).
!7 MUL
TI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE
Indicates the function of the multi-function switches.
!8 TX INDICATOR
➥
“ ” appears while transmitting. (p. 36)
➥ Indicates the frequency readout for transmit.
• “ ” appears during an operating frequency is
not in an amateur band. When the band edge warn-
in
g beep is set to “OFF” (p. 31), “
” does not
appear.
• Appears on the sub band readout when the split
function is turned ON.
!9 RIT INDICATOR
“
” appears when RIT function is in use.
@0 ∂TX INDICATOR
“
” appears when ∂TX function is in use.
@1 RIT/∂TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR
Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or ∂TX func-
t
ion.
@2 NO
TCH INDICATOR (p. 83)
➥ “
” appears when the manual notch function
is in use. This function is available in SSB, CW,
RTTY, PSK and AM modes.
➥ “ ” appears when the auto notch function is
in use. This function is available in SSB, AM
and FM modes.
@3 APF/TPF INDICA
TOR
➥ “ ” appears when the audio peak filter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in CW
mode. (p. 39)
➥ “ ” appears when the twin peak filter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in RTTY
mode. (p. 47)
@4 DU
AL WATCH INDICATOR
“ ” appears when the dualwatch function
is in use.
14
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The following screens can be selected from the
start-up screen. Choose the desired screen using the
following chart.
Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the
start-up screen. See p. 119 for set mode arrangement.
• Spectrum scope screen (p. 65)
• Voice recorder screen* (p. 90)
• RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. 46)
• Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 40)
• Memory list screen (p. 100)
• PSK decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 54)
• Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 107)
• Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 109)
• Set mode menu screen (p. 118)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-3
F-4
F-5F-2
F-5F-3
F-6F-3
F-4 F-5 F-6
*Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is displayed.
Push [T/R] (F-6) to switch the screen.
■ Screen menu arrangement
15
1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ Unpacking
After unpacking, immediately report any damage to
the delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping
cartons.
For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-
ment included with the IC-7600, see ‘Supplied acces-
sories’ on p. i of this manual.
■ Selecting a location
Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-
quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or
vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-
ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.
The base of the transceiver has adjustable feet
for desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles
depending on your operating preference.
■ Grounding
To prevent electrical shock, television interference
(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-
lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND
terminal on the rear panel.
For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap
to a long ground rod. Make the distance between the
[GND] terminal and ground as short as possible.
R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND]
terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-
tion could cause an explosion or electric shock.
[GND]
■ Antenna connection
For radio communications, the antenna is of criti-
cal importance, along with output power and receiver
sensitivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched
50 ø antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or
better of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) on
your operating bands. The transmission line should
be a coaxial cable.
When using a single antenna, use the [ANT1] con-
nector.
CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from light-
ning by using a lightning arrestor.
PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE
30 mm
10 mm (soft solder)
10 mm
1–2 mm
solder solder
Soft
solder
Coupling ring
Slide the coupling ring
down. Strip the cable
jacket and soft solder.
Slide the connector
body on and solder it.
Screw the coupling
ring onto the connec-
tor body.
Strip the cable as
shown at left. Soft sol-
der the center con-
ductor.
q
w
e
r
30 mm (
9
⁄8 in)　10 mm (
3
⁄8 in)　1–2 mm (
1
⁄16 in)
Antenna SWR
Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency
range and SWR may be increased out-of-range.
When the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the
transceiver’s power drops to protect the final tran-
sistors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful
to match the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR
allows full power for transmitting. The IC-7600 has
an SWR meter to monitor the antenna SWR contin-
uously.
2
16
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Required connections
D Front panel
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
M.SC OPE
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
CW KEY
A straight key can be used
when the internal electronic
keyer is turned OFF in
keyer set mode. (p. 45)
MICROPHONES (p. 23)
SM-50HM-36
D Rear panel
1 2ANT
DC 13.8V
X-VERTER
RX-ANT
ACC
TUNER
IN OUT ALC SEND
KEY
1 2
METER
REMOTE
EXT
-
SP
ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. 16)
STRAIGHT KEY
GROUND
(p. 16)
Use the heaviest gauge
wire or strap available and
make the connection as
short as possible.
Grounding prevents electri-
cal shocks, TVI and other
problems.
DC POWER SUPPLY (p. 20)
PS-126
ANT1 for 1.8–18 MHz bands
ANT 2 for 21–28 MHz bands
[Example]:
17
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
■ Advanced connections
D Front panel
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
M.SCOPE
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
MIC
USB-MEMORY
The AFSK modulation signal can also
be input to [MIC].
KEYBOARD
Connects a USB type PC keyboard
directly for RTTY/PSK operation, as
well as other text edit operations.
EXTERNAL KEYPAD
Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory, keyer
memory, RTTY TX memory and PSK TX memory controls.
HEADPHONES
To [MIC] connector pin e
To [MIC] connector pin u
1.5k˘
±5%
1.5k˘
±5%
2.2k˘
±5%
4.7k˘
±5%
S1
(T1/M1/
RT1/PT1)
S2
(T2/M2/
RT2/PT2)
S3
(T3/M3/
RT3/PT3)
S4
(T4/M4/
RT4/PT4)
EXTERNAL KEYPAD
D Rear panel— 1
1 2ANT
DC 13.8V
X-VERTER
RX-ANT
ACC
TUNER
IN OUT ALC SEND
KEY
1 2
METER
REMOTE
EXT
-
SP
RX ANT IN/OUT
Connects an external
preamp or lowpass filter.
The antenna connector
must be selected as “ANT
1/R” or “ANT 2/R.” (p. 3)
ACC SOCKETS 1, 2
(pgs. 22, 24)
ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. 112)
Connects a linear amplifier,
antenna selector, etc.
[X-VERTER]
Connects a transverter
for V/UHF band use.
[ALC], [SEND] (p. 21)
Used for connecting a
non-Icom linear amplifier.
EXTERNAL SPEAKER
(p. 161)
SP-23
(option)
[REMOTE] (p. 151)
Used for computer
control and transceive
operation.
The optional CT-17 is
required when connect-
ing a PC to [REMOTE].
AH-4 (p. 20)
AH-2b
or long wire
with
18
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Rear panel— 2
1 2ANT
DC 13.8V
X-VERTER
RX-ANT
ACC
TUNER
IN OUT ALC SEND
KEY
1 2
METER
REMOTE
EXT
-
SP
[METER]
Connects an external meter, etc.
3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8" plug
Output impedance : 4.7 kø
Output voltage (open circuit) : 2.5 V (default)
Output voltage can be adjusted 0 to 5 V
in ACC set mode. (p. 125)
[USB] (B)
When the transceiver is connected
to a PC, a USB cable (third party)
should be connected to the USB
connector (B type) on the rear
panel. (p. 11)
■ USB connection
Connect the USB-Memory* to the USB connector
(A type) on the front panel.
• Unmount operation is recommended before removing the
USB-Memory* (p.142).
Be sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly.
NEVER connect or remove the USB-Memory when
the read/write indicator lights or blinks.
A USB keyboard* or a USB hub* can also be
connected to the USB connector.
* USB-Memory, USB keyboard and USB hub are not
supplied by Icom.
or
19
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
■ Power supply connections
Use a DC power supply with a 23 A capacity when
operating the transceiver with AC power. Refer to the
diagrams below.
CAUTION: Before connecting the DC power
cable, check the following important items. Make
sure:
• The [POWER] switch is OFF.
• Output voltage of the power source is 12–15 V
when you use a non-Icom power supply.
• DC power cable polarity is correct.
Red : Positive + terminal
Black : Negative _ term
inal
CONNECTING A DC POWER SUPPLY
A DC power supplyAC outlet
AC cable
30 A fuses
Supplied DC power cable
13.8 V; at least 23 A
_+
Transceiver
To DC power
socket
GND
BlackRed
■ External antenna tuner connection
CONNECTING THE AH-4
The AH-4 must be connected to [ANT1].
Coaxial cable (from the AH-4)
[ANT1]
Control cable
Transceiver
GND
AH-4
Long wire or optional AH-2b
[TUNER]
GND
CONNECTING PS-126 DC POWER SUPPLY
PS-126
DC power
cable
To DC power socket
Transceiver
AC outlet
AC cable
GND
20
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Linear amplifier connections
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO
EXCITER
1
1&2
To an
antenna
ACC-1
ANT
ANT2ANT1 ACC 2
INPUT1
INPUT2
REMOTE
GND
IC-PW1/EURO
AC outlet
(Non-European versions : 100–120/220–240 V
European version : 230 V)
Transceiver
REMOTE
Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)
ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)
Be sure to connect the cable
to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack.
Coaxial cable
(supplied with the
IC-PW1/EURO)
Coaxial cable*
*Purchase separately
Connect
[INPUT2]
if necessary
GND
GND
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier
RF OUTPUT RF INPUT
ALC
SEND
50 ø
coaxial
cable
Transceiver
ANT1
ALC SEND
To an
antenna
Non-Icom linear amplifier
R WARNING:
Set the transceiver output power and linear
amplifier ALC output level after referring to the
linear amplifier instruction manual.
The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to –
4 V. The transceiver does not accept positive volt-
a
ge. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings
could overheat or damage the linear amplifier.
The maximum signal level of [SEND] jack is
16 V/0.5 A DC with initial setting, and 250 V/
200 mA with “MOSFET” setting (see p. 125 for de-
t
ails). Use an external relay unit if your non-Icom
linear amplifier requires control voltage and/or
current greater than specified.
21
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
■ Transverter jack information
When 2 to 13.8 V is applied to pin 6 of [ACC 2], the
[X-VERTER] connector is activated for transverter op-
eration and the antenna connectors do not receive or
transmit any signals.
While receiving, the [X-VERTER] connector can be
activated as an input terminal from an external trans-
verter.
While transmitting, the [X-VERTER] connector out-
puts signals of the displayed frequency at –20 dBm
(22 mV) as signals for the external transverter.
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections
To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the diagram below.
D FSK operation— when connecting to [ACC 1]
D AFSK operation
D When connecting to the [USB] connector
Connect a USB cable (third party’s) between the transceiver’s USB connector [USB] (B) on the rear panel and
the PC. (p. 19)
• Icom HP (http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.html) gives the USB driver and the installation guide download service.
Transverter connector
PC
RS-232C
TNC or scan converter
• When using a PC application
• When using a TNC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rear panel view
Rear panel view
RTTY
GND
AF
SEND
RTTY
GND
AF
SEND
RTTY OUTPUT
GND
AUDIO INPUT
PTT
RTTY OUTPUT
GND
AUDIO INPUT
PTT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connect to serial port, parallel
port, speaker jack, microphone
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.
See the instruction manual of the
application for details.
Connect to serial port, parallel
port, speaker jack, microphone
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.
See the instruction manual of
the application for details.
• When connecting to [ACC 1]
• When connecting to [MIC]
• When using a PC application
• When using a TNC
PC
RS-232C
TNC or scan converter
PTT
Audio output
AF input
GND
AFSK output
AF input
GND
PTT*
SQL input
†
*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction
manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.).
†
When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.).
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
z
z
x
x
c
c
v
v*
z
x
c
v
z
x
c
v
b
b
n
†
n
†
b
n
†
Rear panel view
Front panel view
22
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Microphone connector information
(Front panel view)
y GND (PTT ground)
t PTT
r Main readout squelch switch
q Microphone input
w +8 V DC output
e Frequency up/down
i Main readout AF output
(varies with [AF])
GND
(Microphone ground)
u
[MIC]
Pin No.
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
w
+8
V DC output Max. 10 mA
e
Frequency up Ground
Frequency down Ground through 470
˘
r
Squelch open “Low” level
Squelch closed “H
igh” level
CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this
can damage the internal 8 V regulator. DC voltage
is applied to pin 1 for microphone operation. Use
caution when using a non-Icom microphone.
■ Microphones
D HM-36
q
w
q
w
r
e
D SM-50 (Option)
q
w
q
w
r
e
q UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]
Change the selected readout frequency or memory
channel.
• Pressing a switch continuously changes the frequency
or memory channel number continuously.
• While pushing [XFC], the transmit readout frequency
can be controlled while in split frequency operation.
• The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset
in the keyer set mode. (p. 45)
w PTT SWITCH
Push and hold to transmit; release to receive.
e PTT LOCK SWITCH (a
vailable for SM-50 only)
Push to toggle between transmit and receive.
r LO
W CUT SWITCH (available for SM-50 only)
Push to cut out the low frequency components of
input voice signals.
23
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
■ Accessory connector information
ACC 1
PIN No.
NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 RTTY Controls RTTY keying
“High” level
“Low” level
Output current
: More than 2.4 V
: Less than 0.6 V
: Less than 2 mA
2 GND Connects to ground. Connected
in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2.
3
SEND
Input/output pin.
Goes to ground when transmitting.
When grounded, transmits.
Ground level
Output current
Input current (Tx)
: –0.5 V to 0.8 V
: Less than 20 mA
: Less than 200 mA
Connected
in parallel with ACC 2 pin 3.
4 MOD
Modulator
input.
Connects to a modulator
Input
impedance
Input level
: 10 k˘
:
Approx. 100 mV rms
5 AF
AF detector output.
Fix
ed, regardless of [AF] position in
default settings. (see notes below)
Output impedance
Output level
: 4.7
k˘
: 100–300 mV rms
6 SQLS
Squelch output.
Goes to ground when squelch opens.
SQL open
SQL closed
: Less than 0.3
V/5 mA
: More than 6.0
V/100 µA
7 13.8 V 13.8
V output when power is ON.
Output current : Max. 1 A
Connected
in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.
8 ALC ALC v
oltage input.
Control voltage
Input
impedance
: –4 V to 0 V
: More than 10
k˘
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5.
ACC 2
PIN No.
NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 8 V Regulated 8 V output.
Output voltage
Output current
: 8.0
V ±0.3 V
: Less than 10
mA
2 GND Same as A
CC 1 pin 2.
3
SEND
Same as ACC 1 pin 3.
4 BAND
Band voltage output.
(V
aries with amateur band)
Output voltage : 0 to 8.0
V
5 ALC Same as A
CC 1 pin 8.
6 TRV
A
ctivates [X-VERTER] input/output
when “HIGH” voltage is applied.
Input impedance
Input voltage
: More than 10
k˘
: 2 to 13.8
V
7 13.8
V Same as ACC 1 pin 7.
NOTE: If the CW sidetone level limit or beep level
limit is in use, the CW sidetone or beep tone de-
creases from the fixed level when the [AF] control
is rotated above a specified level. (p. 123)
24
2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Before first applying power
Before first applying power, make sure all connec-
tions required for your system are complete by refer-
ring to Chapter 2.
After all connections have been done, set controls
and switches as shown in the figure below.
TWIN
-
PBT
RIT/ TX
Ӡ
NOTCH
CW PITCH
VOICE MEMORY
BAL NR
AF RF/SQL
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK
-
IN DELAY KEY SPEED
TIMER
PHONES
ELEC
-
KEY
MIC
AUTO
TUNE
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
CHANGE
TS
XFC
SPLIT
DUAL
WATCH
MAIN
/
SUB
M.SCOPE
VFO/MEMO
MP
-
W
MW
MP
-
R
F
-
6
F
-
5
F
-
4
F
-
3
F
-
2
F
-
1
NRNB
PBT
-
CLR
APF/TPF
NOTCH
POWER
RIT
CLEAR
TX
Ӡ
SPEECH
LOCK
FILTER
REC PLAY
EXIT
/
SET
SSB CW
RTTY
/
PSK
AM/FM
MONITOR
TRANSMIT
TUNER
HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER
LOCKTX RX SPLIT
[NOTCH]
: 12 o’clock
[NR]
: Max. CCW
[RF POWER]
: Max. CW
[BK-IN DELAY]
: 12 o’clock
[KEY SPEED]
: 10–12 o’clock
[MIC GAIN]
: 12 o’clock
[BAL]
: 12 o’clock
[AF]
: Max. CCW
[RF/SQL]
: 12 o’clock
[CW PITCH]
: 12 o’clock
: Max. clockwise
: Max. counterclockwise
CW
CCW
■ Applying power (CPU resetting)
First applying power:
Reset the transceiver using the following procedure.
Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in
memory channels and returns programmed values
in set mode to default values.
q Make sure the transceiver power is OFF.
w While pushing and holding [F-INP ENT] and [MW],
push [POWER] to turn power ON.
• The CPU is reset.
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.
• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies
when resetting is complete.
e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if
desired.
Normal applying power:
Push [POWER] to turn power ON, then check the dis-
play. When any of indicators appear, turn them OFF if
necessary. (See the appropriate page for details.)
POWER
F-INP
ENT
MW
3
25
BASIC OPERATION
26
3
BASIC OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Selecting VFO/memory mode
➥ Push [VFO/MEMO] to switch between VFO and
memory modes.
• “VFO” appears when in VFO mode, or the selected
memory channel number appears when in memory
mode.
•
Pushing and holding [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. transfers
the contents of the selected memory channel to VFO
mode. (p.
102)
■ Main/Sub band selection
The IC-7600 has the main and sub band.
The main band is displayed on the left hand side, and
the sub band is displayed on the right hand side of
the LCD. Some functions can only be applied to the
selected band and transmission occurs on the main
band (except during split frequency operation).
➥ Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to select access to
the main or sub band readout.
• The selected readout frequency is displayed clearly.
The sub readout functions only during split operation or
dualwatch.
D Main/Sub band switching
➥ Push [CHANGE] to switch the frequency and
selected memory channel between main and sub
readouts.
• Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre-
quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. 88)
D Main/Sub band equalization
➥ Push and hold [CHANGE] for 1 sec. to equalizes
the sub band readout to the main band readout.
VFO/MEMO
MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE
M.SCOPE
CHANGE
“VFO” indicator Memory channel number
Access to SUB band
MAIN band SUB band
Access to MAIN band
MAIN band SUB band
■ Selecting an operating band
The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories
for each band key, storing frequency and mode infor-
mation.
This function is convenient when you operate 3 oper-
at
ing modes on one band. For example, one register
is used for a CW frequency, another for a SSB fre-
quency and the other one for a RTTY frequency.
If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and oper-
at
ing mode last used are called up. When the key is
pushed again, another stored frequency and operat-
ing mode are called up.
See the table below for a list of the bands available
and the default settings for each band.
Band keys
BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3
1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW
3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB
7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW
10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW
14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW
18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB
21 MHz 21.200000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW
24 MHz 24.950000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 24.900000 MHz CW
28 MHz 28.500000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 28.100000 MHz CW
50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM
General 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB
D Using the band stacking registers
[Example]: 14 MHz band
q
Push [14 5], then select a frequency and an oper-
ating mode.
• The previously selected frequency and an operating
mode are memorized in first band stacking register of
that band.
w Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
• The frequency and operating mode that is selected in
step q
are memorized in 14 MHz first band stacking
register.
e Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
• The frequency and operating mode that is selected in
step w
are memorized in 14 MHz second band stack-
ing register.
r Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
• The frequency and operating mode that is selected in
step e
are memorized in 14 MHz third band stacking
register.
• When [14 5] is
pushed again, the first band stacking
register set in step w,
is over written.
GENE F
-
INP
1.8 3.5
1 2
14
5
18
6
7
3
24
8
28
9
50
0
ENT
4
7
10
21
27
3
BASIC OPERATION
■ Frequency setting
The transceiver has several tuning methods for con-
venient frequency tuning.
D Tuning with the main dial
q Push the desired band key on the keypad 1–3
times.
• 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band
with the band key. (See previous page “Using the band
stacking registers.”)
w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency.
If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indica-
tor lights, and the main dial does not function.
In this case, push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for
1 sec. to deactivate the lock function. (p. 82)
When “LOCK/SPEECH” is selected in “[SPEECH/
LOCK] Switch” item in others set mode, pushing
[SPEECH/LOCK] deactivates the lock function.
(see p. 131 for details)
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad
The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency
entry as described below.
q Push [F-INP ENT].
• “ ” indicator appears.
w Input the desired frequency.
• Push [GENE •] to input “. (decimal point)” between the
MHz units and kHz units.
e Push [F-INP ENT] to set the input frequency.
•
To cancel the input, push [EXIT/SET].
Main dial
Band keys
Keypad
1.8
1
3.5
2
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
10
4
GEN
•
50
0
14
5
1.8
1
21
7
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
24
8
GEN
•
50
0
3.5
2
14
5
50
0
F-INP
ENT
50
0
F-INP
ENT
GEN
•
21
7
18
6
10
4
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
GEN
•
3.5
2
14
5
1.8
1
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
GEN
•
14
5
F-INP
ENT
F-INP
ENT
21
7
[EXAMPLE]
14.025 MHz
18.0725 MHz
706 kHz
5.100 MHz
7.000 MHz
21.280 MHz � 21.245 MHz
28
3
BASIC OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only)
Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete
frequencies and must adhere to the following:
• USB mode
• Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)
• 2.8 kHz bandwidth
It’s your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-
mis
sion in this band meets the stringent conditions
under which amateur operations may use these fre-
quencies.
NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-
quencies, mode and filter settings into memory
channels for easy recall.
* The FCC specifies center frequencies on the
5 MHz band. However, the IC-7600 displays car-
rier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to
1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center
frequency.
D Quick tuning step
The operating frequency can be changed in larger
steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable)
for quick tuning.
q Push [TS] to turn the qu
ick tuning function ON.
• “Z” appears when the quick tuning function is ON.
w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in
programmed kHz steps.
e Push [TS] again to turn the quick tuning function
OFF.
• “Z” disappears.
r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired.
D Selecting “kHz” step
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON.
• “Z” appears when the quick tuning function ON.
w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning
step set mode.
• Selected tuning steps for all modes appear.
e Select the desired operating mode.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning
step.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to return to the
default setting, if desired.
t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps
for other modes, if desired.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the setting display.
NOTE: When entering quick tuning step set mode,
the quick tuning function must be activated first.
IC-7600 Displayed
Frequency*
FCC Channel
Center Frequency*
5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz
5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz
5.36650 MHz 5.36800 MHz
5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz
5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz
To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within
the rules specified by the FCC, transmission is
illegal on any 5 MHz band frequency other than the
five frequencies indicated in the table above.
Main dial
TS
Main dial
TS
Mode selection
F-4
EXIT/SET
DEF
Quick tuning indicator
29
3
BASIC OPERATION
D Selecting 1 Hz step
A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine
tuning.
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF.
w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tun-
ing step ON and OFF.
NOTE:
• RIT and/or ∂TX also functions in 1 Hz tuning step
when used.
• The frequency is changed in 50 Hz step when the
[UP]/[DN] switches of the microphone are used
for the frequency setting (when the programma-
ble tuning step is not selected.)
D Auto tuning step function
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed
accelerates automatically as selected.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
set mode menu screen.
e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “MAIN DIAL
Auto TS.”
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition
from HIGH, LOW and OFF.
• HIGH : Approx. 5 times faster when the tun-
ing step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps;
approx. 2 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps.
• LOW : Approx. 2 times faster
• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.
D
1
⁄4 tuning step function
When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the
1
⁄4 tuning function is available. Dial rotation is reduced
to
1
⁄4 of normal speed when the
1
⁄4 tuning function is
ON for finer tuning control.
➥ Push [1/4] (MF7) to toggle the
1
⁄4 tuning function
ON and OFF.
• “ ” appears when the
1
⁄4 tuning function is ON.
TS
Main dial
F-1 F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
SET
F-5
OTHERS
1 ⁄ 4
¼ tuning step OFF ¼ tuning step ON
1 Hz step indicator
HIGH (default)
30
3
BASIC OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Band edge warning beep
When you tune inside or outside of an amateur band’s
frequency range, a warning beep sounds. (“ ”
may be indicated on outside of an amateur band’s fre-
quency.) (p. 14)
This function can be turned OFF in set mode, if desired.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
set mode menu screen.
e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Beep (Band
Edge).”
t Rotate the main dial to select the band edge warn-
ing beep function.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 123)
When the band edge warning beep is set to “ON”:
The
band edge warning beep sounds (enter: Pi, exit:
Bu) according to the set mode setting as follows.
• ON (Default)
Band edge beep sounds when an operating frequency
enters or exits the default amateur band. (default)
• ON (User)
A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or
exits an amateur band that is set in band edge screen.
• ON (User) & TX Limit
Same as the setting of “ON (User).” However, the
transmission can be made in the set frequency
range only.
To programming the band edge:
W
hen “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” is
selected, [BAND] appears in the display above the
function switch (F-5), and up to 30 band edge fre-
quencies can be set in band edge screen.
q
Perform the steps q to t as above, then select
“ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit.”
w Push [BAND] (F-5) to enter the band edge screen.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
band edge.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set content for band
edge, lower or upper.
•
Push [INS] (MF6) to
insert a new blank band edge line.
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF7) for 1 sec. to delete the
selected band edge l
ine.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to display the
band edge initialize screen. Then, push and hold
[OK] (F-5) to initialize all band edge frequency settings.
r Input the desired frequency with the keypad.
• Push [GENE •] to input “. (decimal point)” between the
MHz units and kHz units.
• Program the frequency in ascending order.
• The frequency that is duplicated or out of an amateur
band cannot be programmed.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.
When the transverter function is in use, the band
edge warning beep sounds with the default setting.
Main dial
F-1 F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
SET
F-5
OTHERS
Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-5
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
DEF
[INS][DEL]
Keypad
OK
/
BAND
• Band edge screen
NOTE: All frequency ranges are set in default. So
you should delete or change it to add the desired
band edge frequency.
ON (Default) (default)
31
3
BASIC OPERATION
ON (User)
Appears
■ Operating mode selection
SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data),
CW, CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse
(RTTY-R), PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data,
FM and FM data modes are available in the IC-7600.
Push the desired mode switch to select a mode of
operation.
See the diagram as at right for the order of selection.
Microphone signals are muted when data mode is
selected depending on the set mode settings
(p. 124).
• Selecting SSB mode
➥ Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB.
• USB is selected first when above 10 MHz; or LSB is
selected first when below 10 MHz operation.
• After USB or LSB is selected, push
[SSB] to toggle
between USB and LSB.
•
After USB or LSB is selected, push and hold
[SSB] for
1 sec. to select USB or LSB data mode, respectively.
• After USB or LSB data mode is selected, push and hold
[SSB] f
or 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, in sequence.
• In USB or LSB data mode, push [SSB] to return to
USB or LSB mode
, respectively.
• Selecting CW mode
➥ Push [CW] to select CW.
• After CW is selected, push [CW] to toggle between CW
and CW reverse mode.
• Selecting RTTY/PSK mode
➥ Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY or PSK.
• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] to
toggle between RTTY and PSK.
•
After RTTY or PSK is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and
RTTY reverse, or, PSK and PSK reverse mode,
respect
ively.
• Selecting AM/FM mode
➥ Push [AM/FM] to select AM or FM.
• After AM or FM is selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle
between AM and FM.
•
After AM or FM is selected, push and hold [AM/FM] for
1 sec. to select AM or FM data mode, respect
ively.
• After AM or FM data mode is selected, push and
hold [AM/FM]
for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, in
sequence.
•
In AM or FM data mode, push [AM/FM] to return to AM
or FM mode
, respectively.
Mode switches
USB
CW
AM
LSB
CW-R
RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R
FM
USB-D1
USB-D2
USB-D3
LSB-D1
LSB-D2
LSB-D3
AM-D1
AM-D2
AM-D3
FM-D1
FM-D2
FM-D3
SSB
CW
RTTY/PSK
AM/FM
: Push mode switch momentary.
: Push and hold mode switch for 1 sec.
32
3
BASIC OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity
Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level.
The squelch removes noise output from the speaker
(closed position) when no signal is received.
• The squelch is particularly effective for AM and FM. It is
also available for other modes.
• 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for any setting of
the [RF/SQL] control.
•
The control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in SSB,
CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM and FM) or
squelch control (RF gain is fixed at maximum) in others
set mode as follows. (p. 128)
SET MODE OPERATION
RF+SQL
(default)
Can be used
in all modes.
Functions as noise squelch or S-meter
squelch in FM modes; S-meter squelch
only in other modes.
SQL
Operates as a squelch control.
• RF gain is fixed at maximum sensitivity.
AUTO
Operates as an RF gain control in
SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK modes.
• Squelch is fixed open.
Operates as a squelch control in AM
and FM modes.
• RF gain is fixed at maximum sensitivity.
❍ Adjusting RF gain (Receive sensitivity)
Normally, [RF/SQL] is set to the 11 o’clock position.
Rotate [RF/SQL] to the 11 o’clock position for maxi-
mum sensitivity.
• Rotating counterclockwise from the maximum position
reduces sensitivity.
• The S-meter indicates receive sensitivity.
❍ Adjusting squelch (Removing non-signal noise)
Rotate [RF/SQL]
clockwise when receiving no signal,
until the noise just disappears.
• [RX] indicator light goes out.
• Rotating [RF/SQL]
past the threshold point invokes the S-
meter squelch— this allows you to set a minimum signal
level needed to open the squelch.
[RF/SQL]
• When setting as RF gain/squelch control
Maximum
RF gain
S-meter
squelch
Noise squelch (FM mode)
Squelch is
open.
RF gain
adjustable
range
Recommended level
• When functioning as RF gain control
(Squelch is fixed open; SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK only)
Minimum RF gain
Adjustable
range
Maximum
RF gain
• When functioning as squelch control
(RF gain is fixed at maximum.)
Squelch is
open.
S-meter
squelch
S-meter squelch
threshold
Noise squelch
threshold
(FM mode)
Shallow Deep
Noise squelch (FM mode)
While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be
heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.
33
3
BASIC OPERATION
■ Volume setting
➥ Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the audio output level.
Increases
Decreases
■ Meter indication selection
The transceiver has 6 transmit meter functions for
your convenience.
➥ Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the
desired meter.
Indicates the RF output power in % (per-
cent).
Indicates the SWR on the transmission
line.
Indicates the ALC level. When the meter
movement shows the input signal level
exceeds the allowable level, the ALC
limits the RF power. In such cases,
reduce the [MIC GAIN] control.
Indicates the compression level when
the speech compressor is in use.
Indicates the drain current of the final
amplifier MOSFETs.
Indicates the drain terminal voltage of
the final amplifier MOSFETs.
D Multi-function digital meter
The IC-7600 can display the multi-function digital
meter on the LCD display. This meter displays all
transmit parameters simultaneously.
q Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to turn
the multi-function digital meter ON.
w Push [P-HOLD] (F-1) to toggle the peak level hold
function ON.
• “ P-HOLD”
appears on the window title when the peak
level hold function is ON.
e Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec., or push
[EXIT/SET] to turn the multi-function digital meter
OFF.
[AF]
METER
Power level readout SWR readout
ALC level readout Compression level
readout
ID readout VD readout
F-1
P-HOLD
METER
EXIT/SET
“P-HOLD” indicator
34
3
BASIC OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Meter type selection
A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7600—
Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters.
Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-
tion.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal
screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [DISP] (F-3)
to select
display set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1)
or [Z] (F-2)
to select “Meter type
(Normal Screen)” item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter
type from “Standard,” “Edgewise” and “Bar.”
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode.
■ Voice synthesizer operation
The IC-7600 has a built-in voice synthesizer to
announce the operating frequency, mode* and S-
meter* in clear, electronically-generated voice, in
English (or Japanese).
Select the desired parameters to be announced, such
as audio level, speed, language, contents, in the oth-
ers set mode in advance. (p. 131)
➥ Push [SPEECH/LOCK] to announce the currently
selected frequency, mode* and S-meter level*.
➥ Push a mode switch to announce the appropriate
mode*.
* The S-meter level and operating mode announcements
can be deactivated, respectively. (p.131)
NOTE: When “LOCK/SPEECH” is selected in
[[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch] item in others set mode,
pushing and holding [SPEECH/LOCK] activates
the voice synthesizer. (p. 131)
Main dial
F-1 F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
SET
F-3
DISP
• Standard meter
• Edgewise meter
• Bar meter
SPEECH
LOCK
35
3
BASIC OPERATION
■ Basic transmit operation
Before transmitting, monitor your selected
operating frequency to make sure transmitting
won’t cause interference to other stations on
the same frequency. It’s good amateur practice
to listen first, and then, even if nothing is heard,
ask “Is the frequency in use?” once or twice,
before you begin operating on that frequency.
D Transmitting
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
ing frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause
interference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-
mit.
• The [TX] indicator lights red.
• “
” appears while transmitting.
w Push [TRANSMIT] again or release [PTT] (micro-
phone) to return to receive.
✔ Adjusting the transmit output power
➥ Rotate [RF POWER].
• Adjustable range : 2 W to 100 W
(AM mode: 1 W to 30 W)
Increases
max. 100 W
(30 W for AM)
Decreases
min. 2 W
(1 W for AM)
Push
D Microphone gain adjustment
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
ing frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause
interference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push [SSB] to select SSB mode.
w Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.
e Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit.
• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.
r While talking into the microphone, rotate
[MIC GAIN] so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t
go outside the ALC zone. (see at right)
MIC GAIN
Recommended level for
an Icom microphone
Increases
Decreases
Push
t Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive.
In addition, the transceiver can display the multi-func-
tion digital meter in the LCD, which displays all trans-
mit meters simultaneously.
[RF POWER]
TRANSMIT
[TX] indicator
[MIC GAIN]
METER
SSB
ALC zone
36
3
BASIC OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Drive gain adjustment
The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB
mode with speech compressor OFF.
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
ing frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause
interference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal
screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1)
to
select level set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1)
or [Z] (F-2)
to select “Drive Gain”
item.
r Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.
t Push [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON,
AM or FM), key down (CW) or push [TRANSMIT]
(RTTY or PSK) to transmit.
y While talking into the microphone, keying down or
transmitting, rotate the main dial so that the ALC
meter reading is within 30% to 50% of the ALC
scale. (p. 36)
• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.
u Release [PTT], stop keying or push [TRANSMIT]
again to return to receive.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode.
Main dial
F-1 F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
SET
METERTRANSMIT
LEVEL /
Drive gain range
37
3
BASIC OPERATION
■ Functions for CW operation
D About CW reverse mode
CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side
band to receive CW signals.
Use when interfering signals are near a desired sig-
nal and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interfer-
ence.
➥ During CW mode, push [CW] to select CW and
CW-R mode.
D About CW pitch control
The received CW audio pitch and CW sidetone can
be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to
900 Hz; in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the
operating frequency.
➥ Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.
• Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz.
The filter set screen graphically displays the CW
pitch operations. (See at right.)
➥ Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to access the
filter set screen.
• The CW pitch frequency is graphically changed in
5 Hz steps when the selected IF filter passband
width is below 500Hz (“
” appears), or in 25 Hz
steps when the selected IF filter passband width is
above 600Hz (“
” disappears).
• Push [EXIT/SET] or push and hold [FILTER] for 1
sec. to return to the prev
ious screen.
D CW sidetone function
When the transceiver is in receive (and the break-in
function is OFF— p. 85) you can listen to the CW sid-
etone without actually transmitting.
This allows you to match your transmit frequency
exactly to another station’s by matching the audio
tone. You can also use the CW sidetone (be sure to
turn OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending.
CW sidetone level can be adjusted in level set mode
(p. 122).
q Push [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to
select level set mode.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Side Tone
Level” item.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the sidetone level.
• Sidetone level is adjustable within 0 to 100 % in 1%
steps.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode.
Matching the frequency of a transmitted and
received signal is called “Zero beat.”
Push
BFO
CW-R mode (USB side)
BFO
Desired signal
CW mode (LSB side)
Interference
Desired signalInterference
[CW PITCH]
Lower frequency
Higher frequency
• Filter set screen
CW pitch frequency (e.g. 700 Hz)
Main dial
F-1 F-2 F-6
EXIT/SET
SET
LEVEL /
4
38
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation
The APF changes the audio frequency response by
boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired
CW signal.
q During CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the
audio peak filter ON and OFF.
• “ ” appears in the display and the indicator on this
switch lights green when the audio peak filter is ON.
w Push and hold [APF/TPF] for 1 sec. several times
to select the desired audio filter width.
• WIDE, MID and NAR filters, or 320, 160 and 80 Hz fil-
ters are available depending on [APF type] item setting
in other set mode. (p. 133)
The APF (Audio Peak Filter) type is also selectable
from “SOFT” and “SHARP” in [APF type] item in oth-
ers set mode (p. 133).
APF/TPF
39
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
40
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Electronic keyer functions
The IC-7600 has a number of convenient functions
for the built-in electronic keyer that can be accessed
from the memory keyer menu.
q During CW mode, push [EXIT/SET] several times
to return to normal screen, if necessary.
w Push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer
screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu
screen.
r Push [SEND] (F-1), [EDIT] (F-2), [001] (F-3) or
[CW KEY] (F-4) to select the desired menu. See
the diagram below.
• Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display.
F-1 F-2 F-4
F-3
EXIT/SET
CW KEYEDITSEND
001KEYER
/
• Memory keyer screen (p. 41)
• Memory keyer menu screen
• Memory keyer edit screen (p. 42)
• Contest number set mode (p. 43)
• Keyer set mode screen (p. 44)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
F-1 F-2
F-3
F-4
EXIT/SET
D Memory keyer screen
Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send
menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using
the edit menu.
• Transmitting
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3)
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push [TRANSMIT] to set the transceiver to trans-
mit, or set the break-in function ON (p. 85).
e Push one of the function keys ([M1] (F-1) to [M4]
(F-4)) to send the contents of the memory keyer.
• Push and hold a function key that is pushed in step q
for 1 sec., or push [REPEAT] (F-6)
while sending the
contents of the memory keyer to send repeatedly; push
any funct
ion key except for to cancel the transmission.
• “
” appears while transmitting repeatedly.
• The contest serial number counter counts each time
the contents are sent.
•
Push [−1] (F-5)
to reduce the contest serial number
count by 1 before sending the contents of the memory
keyer to a station a second time.
• “M1”–“M4” are highlighted while transmitting.
• Set the repeat interval of the memory keyer to 1–60
sec. (1 sec. steps). See p. 44 for keyer set mode.
r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to normal screen.
For your information
When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] con-
nector on the front panel, or one of [F1]−[F4] key
of the keyboard that is connected to the [USB] (A)
connector on the front panel is pushed, the pro-
grammed contents, M1—M4, can be transmitted
without selecting the memory keyer screen.
See pgs. 18, 133, 134 for details.
F-3 F-5
EXIT/SET
−1
KEYER
TRANSMIT
F-4
M4
F-1
M1
—
• Memory keyer screen
Count up trigger
During transmitting:
Appears while transmitting.
Appears while transmitting repeatedly.
41
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Editing a memory keyer
The contents of the memory keyer memories can be
set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory
keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes
for often-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers,
etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac-
ters per memory channel.
• Programming contents
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3)
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu,
then push [EDIT] (F-2) to select keyer edit screen.
• Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) is selected.
e Push [M1..M4] (F-6) several times to select the
desired memory keyer channel to be edited.
r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to
select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for
number input.
• [Symbol] appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when
“123” character group is selected.
•
Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Characters
A to Z (capital letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
/ ? ^ . , @ ✱
NOTE:
“^” is used to transmit a string of characters with no
inter-character space. Put “^” before a text string
such as ^AR, and the string “ar” is sent with no
space.
“✱” is used to insert the CW contest serial num-
ber. The serial number automatically increments by
1. This function is available only for one memory
keyer channel at a time. Memory keyer channel M2
used “✱” by default.
t Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor
backwards or forwards, respectively.
• Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4)
inserts a space.
y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters.
u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to normal screen.
✔ For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to
[USB] (A)
con-
nector on the front panel, the memory keyer contents
can also be edited from the keyboard.
F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
EDIT
F-3
KEYER
M1..M4
F-1 F-2 F-4
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123
F-3
DEL
SPACE
Keypad
• Memory keyer edit screen
• Example— entered “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST”
into memory keyer channel 3
• Pre-programmed contents
CH Contents
M1
CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST
M2
UR 5NN✱ BK
M3 CFM TU
M4 QRZ?
42
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Contest number set mode
This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number
and count-up trigger, etc.
• Setting contents
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3)
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu,
then push [001] (F-3) to select contest serial num-
ber set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default condition or value.
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to normal screen.
• Contest number set mode screen
Main dial
F-1 F-2
F-4
EXIT/SET
F-3
KEYER 001
/
001CLR
/
DEF
Number Style Normal
This item sets the numbering system used for con-
test (serial) numbers— normal or short morse num-
bers.
Short morse numbers are also referred to as “cut”
numbers.
• Normal : Does not use short morse numbers
(default)
• 190➔ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.
• 190➔ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.
•
90➔ NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.
•
90➔ NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.
Count Up Trigger M2
The count-up trigger allows the contest serial num-
ber to automatically increment after each complete
serial number exchange is sent.
• M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2)
Present Number 001
This item shows the current number for the count-up
trigger channel set above.
• Rotate the main dial to change the number, or
push and hold [001CLR] (F-4) for 1 sec. to reset
the current number to 001.
43
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Keyer set mode
This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat
time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type,
etc.
• Setting contents
q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3)
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu,
then push [CW KEY] (F-4) to select keyer set
mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default condition or value.
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to normal screen.
Main dial
F-1 F-2 F-3
EXIT/SET
F-4
KEYER
CW KEY
/
DEF
• Keyer set mode screen
Keyer Repeat Time 2s
When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item
sets the time between transmission.
• 1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected.
(default: 2 sec.)
Dot/Dash Ratio 1:1:3.0
This item sets the dot/dash ratio.
Keying weight example: Morse code “K”
DASH
Weight setting:
1:1:3 (default)
Weight setting:
Adjusted
DASH
DOT (fixed*)
Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)
*SPACE and DOT length can be
adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only.
• 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.
(default: 1:1:3.0)
Rise Time 4ms
This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW
envelope.
Key action
Tx output power
• About rise time
Rise time
Tx
Rx
Set Tx power level
Time
0
• 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 msec. can be selected.
(default: 4 msec.)
Key clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated
if the rise time of a CW waveform is too short.
☞ Continues to the next page.
44
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Keyer set mode (continued)
Paddle Polarity Normal
This item sets the paddle dot-dash polarity. • Normal and reverse polarity can be selected.
Keyer Type ELEC-KEY
This item selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY]
connector on the front panel.
• Straight key, BUG-KEY and ELEC-KEY can be
selected. (default: ELEC-KEY)
MIC Up/Down Keyer OFF
(Microphone’s [UP]/[DN] switches keyer)
This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/
[DN] switches to be used as a paddle. (The micro-
phone [UP]/[DN] switches do not work as a
‘squeeze key.’)
• ON : [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.
• OFF : [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for CW.
NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and
memory channel cannot be changed using the
[UP]/[DN] sw
itches.
45
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ RTTY (FSK) operation
A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/
decoder is built-in to the IC-7600. When connecting
a PC keyboard (pgs. 18, 19), RTTY operation can be
performed without an external RTTY terminal, TNC or
PC.
If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC,
consult the manual that comes with the RTTY termi-
nal or TNC.
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY.
• After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and
RTTY-R modes.
•
“RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.
• RTTY tuning indicator appears.
e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode
screen.
• The IC-7600 has a built-in Baudot decoder.
r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical
waveform and ensure the peak points align with
the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency
lines in the FFT scope.
• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when
signal is received.
t Press [F12] on the connected PC’s keyboard to
transmit.
• [TX] indicator lights red.
y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that
you want to transmit.
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer
screen and transmitted immediately.
• The text color will be changed when transmitted.
• Press one of
[F1]–[F8]
on the keyboard to transmit the
TX memory contents.
u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.
✔ For your convenience
The transmission contents can be typed before being
transmitted.
q Perform the steps q to r above.
w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
message that you want to transmit.
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer
screen.
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit
the typewritten contents.
• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will
be changed when transmitted.
• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] tw
ice.
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-3
[TX]
indicator
[RX]
indicator
Band keys
RTTY/PSK
DECODE
AppearsAppears
2125/170
1905 2515
FFT scope
TX buffer screen
TX/RX contents screen
Water-fall
46
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D About RTTY reverse mode
Received characters are occasionally garbled when
the received signal is reversed between Mark and
Space tones. This reversal can be caused by incor-
rect TNC connections, setting, commands, etc.
To receive a reversed RTTY signals correctly, select
RTTY-R (RTTY Reverse) mode.
➥ During RTTY mode, push and hold [RTTY/PSK]
for 1 sec. to select RTTY-R mode.
• Check the received signal.
D Twin peak filter
The twin peak filter changes the audio frequency
response by boosting the mark and space frequen-
cies (2125 and 2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY
signals.
➥
During RTTY mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the
twin peak filter ON and OFF.
• “
” appears in the LCD and the indicator on
this switch lights green while the filter is in use.
NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the
received audio output may increase. This is a nor-
mal, not a malfunction.
Normal Reverse
Space
Mark
BFO
Space
Mark
BFO
170 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz2125 Hz
APF/TPF
47
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY.
• After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold [RTTY/
PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R
modes.
•
“RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.
e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode
screen.
• When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters
are displayed in the RX contents screen.
r Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current
screen.
• “ ” appears while the function is in use.
• Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2)
again to cancel the function.
t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to
clear the displayed characters.
• “ ” indicator disappears at the same time when
the hold function is in use.
y Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the RTTY decode
screen size from normal and wide.
• S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be
selected in display set mode. (p. 129)
u Push [EXIT/SET] to close the RTTY decode
screen.
D Setting the decoder threshold level
Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some
characters are displayed when no signal is received.
q Select the RTTY decode screen as described
above.
w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-
ting condition.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder
threshold level.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to exit from the threshold level
setting condition.
The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new
line code can be set in the RTTY set mode.
(p. 51)
EXIT/SET
F-3 F-6
Band keys
F-2
RTTY/PSK
DECODE
HOLD/CLR
WIDE
• RTTY Decode screen (Normal)
• RTTY Decode screen (Wide)
Main dial
F-4 F-5
DEFADJ
Threshold level indication bar
48
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D RTTY memory transmission
Pre-set characters can be sent using the RTTY memory.
Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu.
q
During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory
screen.
e Push [1–4/5–8] (F-6) to select memory bank then
push one of the function keys ([RT1] (F-1) to
[RT4] (F-4) or [RT5] (F-1) to [RT8] (F-4)).
• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory
contents will be transmitted immediately.
• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents
will be transmitted immediately when
[F1] to [F8] on
the
connected keyboard is pressed, or transmitted after
[F12] is
pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below).
• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time
may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on
setting.
For your information
When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] con-
nector on the front panel, the programmed contents,
RT1—RT4, can be transmitted. (pgs. 18, 133)
or
F-3 F-6
–
F-1 F-4
RT1 RT4
–
F-1 F-4
RT5 RT8
/
DECODE TX MEM 1–4/5–8
• RTTY memory screen
D Automatic transmission/reception setting
q
During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select RTTY
memory edit screen.
• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is
selected.
e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired RTTY memory.
r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several times to select the
desired condition as follow.
• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the
selected memory and returns to
receive after the transmission.
• AUTO TX :
Automatically transmits the selected
memory. To return to receive, press
[F12] on the keyboard.
• AUTO RX : Press [F12] on the keyboard
to transmit the selected memory.
Automatically returns to receive
after the transmission.
• No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard
to transmit the selected memory
and press [F12] again to return to
receive.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit RTTY memory edit condi-
tion.
NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the
“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-
nected.
EXIT/SET
F-3 F-6
F-5
/
DECODE TX MEM
AUTO TXEDIT
/
RT1..RT8
Auto TX/RX settings
49
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Editing RTTY memory
The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using
the memory edit menu. The memory can store and
re-transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY
information. Total capacity of the memory is 70 char-
acters per memory channel.
• Programming contents
q
During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select RTTY
memory edit screen.
• RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is
selected.
e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired RTTY memory channel to be edited.
r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to
select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for
number input.
• [Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed
when “123” character group is selected.
•
Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Characters
A to Z (capital letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
! $ & ? " ’ – / . , : ; ( ) ↵
t
Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor
backwards or forwards, respectively.
• Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4)
inserts a space.
y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit
RTTY memory edit screen.
✔ For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the RTTY memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.
EXIT/SET
F-3 F-6
F-5
/
DECODE TX MEM
EDIT
RT1..RT8
F-1 F-2 F-4
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123
F-3
DEL
SPACE
Keypad
• RTTY memory edit screen
• Pre-programmed contents
CH Contents
RT1
↵DE ICOM ICOM K↵
RT2
↵DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵
RT3
↵QSL UR 599–599 BK↵
RT4
↵QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599 BK↵
RT5
↵73 GL SK↵
RT6
↵CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵
RT7
↵MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7600 & ANTENNA
IS A 3–ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI.↵
RT8
↵MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK
UNIT & DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7600.↵
50
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D RTTY decode set mode
This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc.
• Setting contents
q
During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select RTTY decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second RTTY
decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select
RTTY decode set mode.
• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size from nor-
mal and wide.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
condition or value.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some
i
tems.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEF
EXIT/SETF-3
F-6
F-1
F-5
Main dial
DECODE
<MENU1>
SET
WIDE
• RTTY decode set mode screen
RTTY FFT Scope Averaging OFF
Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)
Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use
of the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended.
RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color
51 153 255
Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.
• The color is set in RGB format.
•
The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB
scale.
•
Push
[Ω ≈] (F-3)
to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
RTTY Decode USOS ON
Turn the capability of letter code decoding after
receiving a “space” (USOS; UnShift On Space func-
tion) ON and OFF.
• ON : Decode as letter code.
• OFF : Decode as character code.
RTTY Decode New Line Code CR,LF,CR+LF
Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY
decoder.
CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed
• CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes new line with any codes.
• CR+LF : Makes new line with CR+LF code
only.
RTTY Diddle BLANK
Selects the diddle condition. • OFF : Turns the diddle function OFF.
• BLANK : Transmits blank code during no code
transmission.
• LTRS : Transmits letter code during no code
transmission.
51
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
RTTY TX USOS ON
Explicitly inserts the FIGS character even though it
is not required by the receiving station.
• ON : Inserts FIGS.
• OFF : Does not insert FIGS.
RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX ON
Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans-
mission capability.
• ON : Transmits CR+LF code once.
• OFF : Transmits no CR+LF code.
RTTY Time Stamp ON
Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception
time) indication ON and OFF.
• ON : Displays the time stamp.
• OFF : No time stamp indication.
RTTY Time Stamp (Time) Local
Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage.
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is
selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.
• Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”
• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”
* The name of choice may differ accord-
ing to “CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 115).
“UTC” is the default name of CLOCK2.
RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency) OFF
Selects the operating frequency indication for time
stamp usage.
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when
“OFF” is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.
• ON : Displays the operating frequency.
• OFF : No operating frequency display.
RTTY Font Color (Receive)
128 255 128
Set the text color for received characters.
• The color is set in RGB format.
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
RTTY Font Color (Transmit)
255 106 106
Set the text color for transmitted characters.
• The color is set in RGB format.
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp)
0 155 189
Set the text color for time stamp indication.
• The color is set in RGB format.
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer)
255 255 255
Set the text color in the TX buffer screen.
• The color is set in RGB format.
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
52
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Data saving
The contents of the RTTY memory/received signal
can be saved into the USB-Memory.
q During RTTY decode screen indication, push
[<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the RTTY decode sec-
ond menu.
w
Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode file save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition.
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the
main dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^
– ( ) { } _
_
@ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push
[≈] (F-2)
to move the cursor right, [DEL] (F-3)
delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
insert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
• File format
z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to
enter save option screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat from Text to HTML.
• “Text” is the default setting.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous
indication.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-4) to select the upper directory.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3)
to select folder in the
same directory.
• Push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
folder
in the directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete
the folder.
• Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
in
g a new folder. (Edit the name with the same
manner as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file
name.
r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5).
• After saving is completed, returns to RTTY decode sec-
ond menu automatically.
✔ For your convenience!
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for
PC data storage.
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEL
SPACE
F-1
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123
SAVE
EDIT
/
DIR/FILE
<MENU1>
/
• Decode file save screen— file name edit
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-5
SAVE/OPT
DEF
F-1
F-5
SAVE/OPT
F-4
F-2 F-3
DIR/FILE
REN DEL
MAKE
• Save option screen
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connector
on the front panel, the file name can also be edited from
the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required.
53
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ PSK operation
A high-quality DSP-based PSK encoder/decoder is
built-in to the IC-7600. When connecting a PC key-
board (pgs. 18, 19), PSK operation can be performed
without PSK software installed on your PC.
If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-
sult the manual that comes with the software.
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK.
• After PSK mode is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and
PSK-R modes.
•
“PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.
e
Push
[DECODE] (F-3)
to display the decode
screen.
• The IC-7600 has a built-in PSK decoder.
r Tune to the desired signal with the main dial.
• The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines
in the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the
example below.
•
The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be
displayed sporadically.
• When a PSK signal is received, the water-fall display is
activated.
•
The water-fall display shows the signals within the pass-
band. Received PSK signals appear as vertical lines.
t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit.
• [TX] indicator lights red.
y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
message that you want to transmit.
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer
screen and transmitted immediately.
• The text color will be changed when transmitted.
• Press one of
[F1]–[F8]
to transmit the TX memory con-
tents.
u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
✔ For your convenience
The transmission contents can be typed before being
transmitted.
q Perform the steps q to r above.
w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
message that you want to transmit.
• The message is shown in the TX buffer screen.
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit
the message.
• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will
be changed when transmitted.
• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] tw
ice.
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
Main dial
EXIT/SET
F-3
[TX]
indicator
[RX]
indicator
Band keys
RTTY/PSK
DECODE
Appears
1500
1195 1805
Vector tuning indicator
FFT scope
TX buffer screen
RX contents screen
Water-fall
• Vector tuning indicator indication example
Tuned BPSK signal
BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal
Tuned QPSK signal
54
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D About BPSK and QPSK modes
BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK.
• BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the most
commonly used mode.
• QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode has
error correction capability to provide better decoding
than BPSK mode in marginal condition. However,
more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode,
due to the tight phase margin of QPSK.
q During PSK mode selection, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to display the PSK decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select PSK decode sec-
ond menu.
e Push [B/QPSK] (F-2) to toggle between BPSK and
QPSK mode alternately.
F-2 F-3F-1
DECODE
B/QPSK<MENU1>
• PSK decode screen— BPSK mode
Appears
• PSK decode screen— QPSK mode
Appears
55
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Functions for the PSK decoder indication
q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK.
• After PSK mode is selected, push and hold [RTTY/
PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R
modes.
•
“PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.
e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode
screen.
• When tuned into a PSK signal, decoded characters are
displayed in the RX contents screen.
r Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current
screen.
• “ ” appears while the function is in use.
• Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2)
again to release the function.
t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to
clear the displayed characters.
• “ ” indicator disappears at the same time when
the hold function is in use.
y Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the PSK decode
screen size from normal and wide.
• S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be
selected in display set mode. (p. 129)
u Push [AFC/NET] (F-5) to turn the AFC function
ON.
• “ ” appears.
• If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range,
the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the
offset frequency is displayed.
• The AFC tuning range is set to ±15 Hz as the default.
Optional ±8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set
mode. (p. 59)
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.
i Push [AFC/NET] (F-5) again to turn the NET func-
tion ON.
• “ ” appears additionally.
o Push and hold [AFC/NET] (F-5) for 1 sec. to add
the offset frequency to the displayed frequency.
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to close the PSK decode screen.
D Setting the decoder threshold level
Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-
acters are displayed when no signal is received.
q Call up the PSK decode screen as described
above.
w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-
ting condition.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder
threshold level.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to exit from the threshold level
setting condition.
EXIT/SET
F-3 F-6F-5
Band keys
F-2
RTTY/PSK
HOLD/CLR
WIDEDECODE AFC/NET
• AFC/NET indications
“AFC” and “NET”
indicators
Offset frequency
Main dial
F-4 F-5
DEFADJ
Threshold level indication bar
56
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D PSK memory transmission
Pre-set characters can be sent using the PSK memory.
Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu.
q
During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select PSK decode screen.
w
Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory screen.
e Push [1–4/5–8] (F-6) to select memory bank then
push one of the function keys ([PT1] (F-1) to
[PT4] (F-4) or [PT5] (F-1) to [PT8] (F-4)).
• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory
contents will be transmitted immediately.
• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents
will be transmitted immediately when
[F1] to [F8] on
the
connected keyboard is pressed, or transmitted after
[F12] is
pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below).
• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time
may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on
setting.
For your information
When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] con-
nector on the front panel, the programmed contents,
PT1—PT4, can be transmitted. (pgs. 18, 133)
or
F-3 F-6
–
F-1 F-4
PT1 PT4
–
F-1 F-4
PT5 PT8
/
DECODE TX MEM 1–4/5–8
D Automatic transmission/reception setting
q
During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select PSK mem-
ory edit screen.
• PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected.
e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired PSK memory.
r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several times to select the
desired condition, as follows.
• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the
selected memory and returns to
receive after the transmission.
• AUTO TX : Automatically transmits the
selected memory. To return to
receive, press [F12] on the key-
board.
• AUTO RX : Press [F12] on the keyboard
to transmit the selected memory.
Automatically returns to receive
after the transmission.
• No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard
to transmit the selected memory
and press [F12] again to return to
receive.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to exit from PSK mem-
ory edit condition.
NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the
“AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-
nected.
EXIT/SET
F-3 F-6
F-5
/
DECODE TX MEM
AUTO TXEDIT
/
PT1..PT8
Auto TX/RX settings
57
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D Editing PSK memory
The contents of the PSK memories can be set using
the memory edit menu. The memory can store and
re-transmit 8 PSK message for often-used PSK infor-
mation. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters
per memory channel.
• Programming contents
q
During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select
PSK
memory
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select
PSK
mem-
ory edit screen.
• PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 (PT1) is
selected.
e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired PSK memory channel to be edited.
r Push [ABC]/[abc] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for
number input.
• [abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed
when “ABC” character group is selected. and [Symbol]
(MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is
pushed when
“123” character group is selected.
•
Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Characters
A to Z (capital letters)
a to z (small letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱
/ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _
_
@
↵
t Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor
backwards or forwards, respectively.
• Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4)
inserts a space.
y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit
PSK
memory edit screen.
✔ For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the
PSK
memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard.
EXIT/SET
F-3 F-6
F-5
/
DECODE TX MEM
EDIT
PT1..PT8
F-1 F-2 F-4
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123
F-3
DEL
SPACE
abc
• PSK memory edit screen
• Pre-programmed contents
CH Contents
PT1
↵DE Icom Icom K↵
PT2
↵DE Icom Icom Icom K↵
PT3
↵QSL UR 599 599 BK↵
PT4
↵QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599 BK↵
PT5
↵73 GL SK↵
PT6
↵CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K↵
PT7
↵My
transceiver is IC–7600 & Antenna is a 3–
element triband yagi.↵
PT8
↵M
y PSK equipment is internal modulator &
demodulator of the IC–7600.↵
58
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D PSK decode set mode
This set mode is used to set the PSK AFC range,
time stamp setting, etc.
• Setting contents
q
During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3)
to select PSK decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second
PSK
decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select
PSK
decode set mode.
• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size from nor-
mal and wide.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
set item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
condition or value.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some
i
tems.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEF
EXIT/SETF-3
F-6
F-1
F-5
Main dial
DECODE
<MENU1>
SET
WIDE
PSK FFT Scope Averaging OFF
Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF)
Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using
the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended.
PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color
51 153 255
Set the color for the FFT scope waveform.
• The color is set in RGB format.
•
The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB
scale.
•
Push
[Ω ≈] (F-3)
to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
PSK AFC Range ±15Hz
Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control)
function operating range from ±15 Hz (default) and
±8 Hz.
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.
PSK Time Stamp ON
Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception
time) display ON and OFF.
• ON : Displays the time stamp.
• OFF : No time stamp display.
PSK Time Stamp (Time) Local
Selects the clock display for time stamp usage.
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is
selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as above.
• Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”
• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”
* The name of choice may differ according to
“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 115). “UTC” is the
default name of CLOCK2.
59
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) OFF
Selects the operating frequency display for time
stamp usage.
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when
“OFF” is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as
below left.
• ON : Displays the operating frequency.
• OFF : No operating frequency display.
PSK Font Color (Receive)
128 255 128
Set the text color for received characters.
• The color is set in RGB format.
•
The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB
scale.
•
Push
[Ω ≈] (F-3)
to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
PSK Font Color (Transmit)
255 106 106
Set the text color for transmitted characters.
• The color is set in RGB format.
•
The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB
scale.
•
Push
[Ω ≈] (F-3)
to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
PSK Font Color (Time Stamp)
0 155 189
Set the text color for time stamp indication.
• The color is set in RGB format.
•
The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB
scale.
•
Push
[Ω ≈] (F-3)
to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
PSK Font Color (TX Buffer)
255 255 255
Set the text color in the TX buffer screen.
• The color is set in RGB format.
•
The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB
scale.
•
Push
[Ω ≈] (F-3)
to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
60
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Data saving
The contents of the PSK memory/received signal can
be saved into the USB-Memory.
q During PSK decode screen indication, push
[<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the PSK decode sec-
ond menu.
w
Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode file save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition.
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the
main dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^
– ( ) { } _
_
@ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push
[≈] (F-2)
to move the cursor right, [DEL] (F-3)
delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
insert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
• File format
z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to
enter save option screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat from Text to HTML.
• “Text” is the default setting.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous
indication.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-4) to select the upper directory.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3)
to select folder in the
same directory.
• Push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
folder
in the directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete
the folder.
• Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
in
g a new folder. (Edit the name with the same
manner as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file
name.
r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5).
• After saving is completed, returns to PSK decode sec-
ond menu automatically.
✔ For your convenience!
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for
PC data storage.
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEL
SPACE
F-1
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123
SAVE
EDIT
/
DIR/FILE
<MENU1>
/
• Decode file save screen— file name edit
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-5
SAVE/OPT
DEF
F-1
F-5
SAVE/OPT
F-4
F-2 F-3
DIR/FILE
REN DEL
MAKE
• Save option screen
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connector
on the front panel, the file name can also be edited from
the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required.
61
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ Repeater operation
A repeater retransmits a received signal on a differ-
ent frequency. When using a repeater, the transmit
frequency is shifted from the receive frequency by an
offset frequency. A repeater can be accessed using
split frequency operation with the transmit frequency
shifted to the repeater's receive frequency.
For accessing a repeater which requires an access
tone, set the tone frequency in tone frequency set
mode as described below.
q Set the offset frequencies (HF, 50 MHz) and turn
ON the quick split function in others set mode in
advance. (pgs. 89, 129)
w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select VFO mode.
e Push the desired band key.
r Push [AM/FM] several times to select FM mode.
t Set the receive frequency (repeater output fre-
quency).
y Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec. to start repeater
operation.
• Repeater tone is turned ON automatically.
• [SPLIT] indicator lights and “
” appears on
the LCD.
•
The tone encoder function is turned ON in FM mode.
• Shifted transmit frequency and “TX” appear in the sub
band.
•
The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-
i
ng [XFC].
u Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to
receive.
i To return to simplex, push [SPLIT] momentarily.
D Repeater access tone frequency setting
Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be
accessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on
your normal signal and must be set in advance. The
transceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.
q During FM mode operation, push and hold [TONE]
(MF7) for 1 sec. to enter tone frequency set mode.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select REPEATER
TONE item.
e Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater
tone frequency.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
r
Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indication.
• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
85.4
088.5
091.5
094.8
097.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
167.9
171.3
173.8
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
192.8
196.6
199.5
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
229.1
233.6
241.8
250.3
254.1
Main
dial
[SPLIT]
indicator
Band keys
AM/FM
SPLIT
VFO/MEMO
XFC
Appears Appears
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-2F-1
DEF
TONE
• Tone frequency set mode
62
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Tone squelch operation
The tone squelch opens only when receiving a sig-
nal containing a matching subaudible tone. You can
silently wait for calls from group members using the
same tone.
q Set the desired frequency band and select FM
mode.
w Push [TONE] (MF7) several times to turn the tone
squelch function ON.
• “ ” appears
e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter
tone frequency set mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select T-SQL TONE
item.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone
squelch frequency.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-
tion.
u When the received signal includes a matching
tone, squelch opens and the signal can be heard.
• When the received signal’s tone does not match,
tone squelch does not open. However, the S-indicator
shows signal strength.
• To open the squelch manually, push
[XFC].
i Operate the transceiver in the normal way.
o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] (MF7) to
clear “TSQL.”
• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
085.4
088.5
091.5
094.8
097.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
167.9
171.3
173.8
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
192.8
196.6
199.5
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
229.1
233.6
241.8
250.3
254.1
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-2F-1
DEF
TONE
XFC
Appears
• Tone frequency set mode
63
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ Data mode (AFSK) operation
When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC
and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes
with the TNC and/or the software.
q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. 22)
w Push a band key to select the desired band.
e Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the desired oper-
ating mode.
r Push and hold [SSB] or [AM/FM] that is pushed in
step e for 1 sec. to turn data mode ON.
• One of “-D1,” “-D2” or “-D3” is additionally appears.
• During data mode selection, push and hold [SSB] or
[AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2)
and 3 (D3)
in sequence.
t Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal
and decode it correctly.
• Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software.
• During SSB data mode, the
1
⁄4 tuning function can be
used for critical tuning.
y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit.
• When operating in SSB data mode, adjust the TNC
output level so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go
outside the ALC zone.
NOTE: When data mode is selected, the audio
input from the [ACC1] (pin 4) is used for transmis-
sion instead of [MIC]’s depending on the set mode
settings. Modulation input connector can be
changed in ACC set mode (p. 124)
The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis-
sion as follows:
• [COMP] : OFF
• Tx bandwidth : MID*
• Tx Tone (Bass) : 0
• Tx Tone (Trebles) : 0
* Fixed to the default value (lower: 300, higher:
2700). (p. 122)
✔ For your information
Carr
ier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode
is selected.
See the diagram at right for the tone-pair example.
Main dial
Band keys
AM/FM
SSB
Appears
• Tone-pair example
200 Hz 2125 Hz
2325 Hz
Carrier frequency
(displayed frequency)
64
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Spectrum scope screen
This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to dis-
play the frequency and relative signal strength of
received signals on the strengths of signals. The IC-
7600 has two modes for the spectrum display— one
is center mode, and the other is fixed mode.
In addition, the IC-7600 has a mini scope screen to
save screen space.
D Center mode
Displays signals around the set frequency within the
selected span. The set frequency is always displayed
at the center of the screen.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen.
e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) several times to select the
center mode.
• “ ” is displayed when center mode is selected.
r Push [SPAN] (F-1) several times to select the
scope span.
• ±2.5, ±5.0, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100 and ±250 kHz are
available.
• Push and hold [SPAN] (F-1) for 1 sec. to return to ±2.5
kHz span.
•
Sweep speed is selectable for each span indepen-
dently
in scope set mode. (pgs. 68, 69)
t Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate an
attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF.
• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.
• Push and hold [ATT] (F-2)
for 1 sec. to turn OFF the
attenuator.
y Push [MARKER] (F-3) several times to turn the
marker for transmit frequency and/or sub readout
frequency ON or OFF.
• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.
• “
” displays the marker at the sub readout frequency.
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.
• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal while
transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set
mode. (p. 68)
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func
-
t
ion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the
current spectrum in a different color. This can be deac-
t
ivated and the waveform color can be set in scope set
mode. (p. 68)
u Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum
display.
• “ ” appears while the function is in use.
• Push and hold [HOLD] (F-4) to clear the current spec-
trum waveform.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal
may also appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several times
to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this
case.
F-1 F-2 F-3
F-5
F-4
EXIT/SET
/
SCOPE
SPAN
ATT
MARKER
HOLD
CENT/FIX
• Scope spurious signal example
Spurious signals may be received on the spectrum
scope screen regardless of the transceiver’s state
(TX or RX). They are generated in the scope circuit.
This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
Scope spurious example
65
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Appears
D Fixed mode
Displays signals within the specified frequency range.
Conditions on the selected frequency band can be
observed at a glance when using this mode.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen.
e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) several times to select the
fixed mode.
• “ ” is displayed when fixed mode is selected.
r Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate an
attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF.
• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.
• Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the
attenuator.
t Push [MARKER] (F-3) several times to turn the
marker for transmit frequency and/or sub readout
frequency ON or OFF.
• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.
• “
” displays the marker at the sub readout frequency.
• “
” displays the marker at the main readout fre-
quency. (always displayed)
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.
• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal while
transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set
mode. (p. 68)
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func
-
t
ion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the
current spectrum in a different color. This can be deac-
t
ivated and the waveform color can be set in scope set
mode. (p. 68)
y Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum
waveform.
• “ ” appears while the function is in use.
• Push and hold [HOLD] (F-4) to clear the current spec-
trum waveform.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal
may appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this
case.
The scope bandwidth can be specified for each fre-
quency band independently in scope set mode.
(pgs. 69 to 71)
F-1 F-2 F-3
F-5
F-4
EXIT/SET
/
SCOPE
SPAN
ATT
MARKER
HOLD
CENT/FIX
66
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Appears
D Mini scope screen indication
The mini scope screen can be displayed with another
screen display, such as set mode menu, decode
screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously.
q Set the scope mode (center or fixed), marker,
attenuator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. 65, 66)
w
Push and hold [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] for 1 sec. to
select the mini scope indication.
• The S/RF meter type during mini scope indication can
be selected in display set mode (Meter Type (Wide
Screen) item). (p. 126)
D Scope set mode
This set mode is used to set the waveform color,
sweeping speed, scope range for fixed mode, etc.
q During spectrum scope display ON, push
[SET] (F-6) to select scope set mode screen.
• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size between
normal and wide.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
set item.
e Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default condition or value.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some
i
tems.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.
MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE
M.SCOPE
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
SET
DEF
67
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) ON
Turn display of the transmit signal ON and OFF.
NOTE: Transmit signal display is available for the
center mode only.
Max Hold ON
Turn the peak level hold function ON and OFF.
CENTER Type Display Filter Center
Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope
indication (center mode only).
• Filter Center : Shows the selected filter’s center
frequency at the center.
• Carrier Point Center
: Shows the selected operating mode
carrier point frequency at the center.
• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.)
: In addition to the carrier point center
setting above, the actual frequency
is displayed for the bottom of the
scope.
Waveform Color (Current)
217 241 247
Set the waveform color for the currently received
signals.
• The color is set in RGB format.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.
Waveform Color (Max Hold)
58 110 147
Set the waveform color for the received signals max-
imum level.
• The color is set in RGB format.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.
Sweep Speed (± 2.5k) MID
Select the sweep speed for the ±2.5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
NOTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with
“FAST” setting.
Sweep Speed (± 5k) MID
Select the sweep speed for the ±5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
NOTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with
“FAST” setting.
Sweep Speed (± 10k) FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±10 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
☞ Continues to the next page.
68
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Scope set mode (continued)
Sweep Speed (± 25k) FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±25 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
Sweep Speed (± 50k) FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±50 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
Sweep Speed (± 100k) FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±100 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
Sweep Speed (± 250k) FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±250 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
Fixed Edges ( 0.03 − 1.60) 0.750 − 1.250 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for
bands below 1.6 MHz.
• Set the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges ( 1.60 − 2.00) 1.800 − 2.000 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
Fixed Edges ( 2.00 − 6.00) 3.500 − 4.000 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 2.000 to 6.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges ( 6.00 − 8.00) 7.000 − 7.300 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 6 to 8 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 6.000 to 8.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
69
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Fixed Edges ( 8.00 − 11.00) 10.100 − 10.150 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 8 to 11 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges (11.00 − 15.00) 14.000 − 14.350 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 11.000 to 15.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges (15.00 − 20.00) 18.068 − 18.168 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges (20.00 − 22.00) 21.000 − 21.450 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 20 to 22 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 20.000 to 22.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges (22.00 − 26.00) 24.890 − 24.990 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 22 to 26 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 22.000 to 26.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
☞ Continues to the next page.
70
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Scope set mode (continued)
Fixed Edges (26.00 − 30.00) 28.000 − 28.500 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 26 to 30 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 26.000 to 30.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges (30.00 − 45.00) 30.000 − 30.500 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 30 to 45 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 30.000 to 45.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges (45.00 − 60.00) 50.000 − 50.500 MHz
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 45 to 60 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 45.000 to 60.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
71
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ Preamplifier
The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver
front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity.
Set this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving
weak signals.
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
➥ Push and hold [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 sec. to turn the
preamp function OFF.
For all HF and 50 MHz bands
High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band
and above (Available for all HF and
50 MHz bands)
✔ About the “P.AMP2”
The “P.AMP 2” is a high gain receive amplifier. When
the “P.AMP 2” is used in the presence of strong elec-
tromagnetic fields, distortion sometimes results. In
such cases, use the transceiver with the “P.AMP 1” or
“P.AMP OFF” setting.
The “P.AMP 2” is most effective when:
• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are
weak.
• Receive sensitivity is insufficient when using low-
gain antennas, or while using a narrow band
antenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna
or a short Yagi antenna).
■ Attenuator
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distor-
tion when very strong signals are near the desired
frequency or when very strong electromagnetic fields,
such as from broadcast stations near your location.
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenua-
tor 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF.
➥ Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the
attenuator function OFF.
6 dB attenuation
12 dB attenuation
18 dB attenuation
P.AMP
ATT
72
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ RIT function
The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-
pensates for off-frequency operation of the received
station.
The function shifts the receive frequency up to ±9.999
kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancelling the 1
Hz step readout) without moving the transmit fre-
quency.
q Push [RIT] to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.
• “ ” and the shifting frequency appear when the
function is ON.
w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.
• Push and hold [CLEAR] for 1 sec. to reset the RIT fre-
quency.
•
Push [CLEAR]
momentarily to reset the RIT frequency
when the quick RIT/
∂TX clear function is ON. (p. 132)
• Push and hold [RIT]
for 1 sec. to add the shift fre-
quency to the operating frequency.
D RIT monitor function
When the RIT function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency
directly (RIT is temporarily cancelled).
✔ For your convenience— Calculate function
The shift frequency of the RIT function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
➥ While displaying the RIT shift frequency, push and
hold [RIT] for 1 sec.
[RIT/∂TX]
CLEAR
RIT
XFC
RIT shifting frequency
73
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ AGC function
The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to
produce a constant audio output level even when the
received signal strength varies greatly.
The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics
(time constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM mode.
The FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as
‘FAST’ (0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot
be changed.
D Selecting the preset value
q Select any non-FM mode.
w Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select AGC
fast, AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow.
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
DEF
[AGC]
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value
q Select any non-FM mode.
w Push and hold [AGC] (MF5) for 1 sec. to enter
AGC set mode.
e Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select FAST
time constant.
r Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC FAST.’
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
t Push [AGC] (MF5) to select medium time con-
stant.
y Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC MID.’
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
u Push [AGC] (MF5) to select slow time constant.
i Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC SLOW.’
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
o Select another non-FM mode, then repeat steps e
to i if desired.
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the AGC set mode screen.
• AGC set mode screen
• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: sec.)
Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant
SSB
0.3 (FAST)
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
2.0 (MID)
6.0 (SLOW)
CW
0.1 (FAST)
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
0.5 (MID)
1.2 (SLOW)
RTTY
PSK
0.1 (FAST)
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
0.5 (MID)
1.2 (SLOW)
AM
3.0 (FAST)
OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0
5.0 (MID)
7.0 (SLOW)
FM 0.1 (FAST) F
ixed
74
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Twin PBT operation
<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM
PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows the IF
passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly
outside of the IF filter passband to reject interference.
The IC-7600 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving
both [TWIN-PBT] controls to the same position shifts
the IF both above and below the received frequency.
➥ The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre-
quency graphically.
• The indicator on the [PBT-CLR] switch lights when
PBT is in use.
➥ Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter the filter
set screen. Current passband width and shift fre-
quency is displayed in the filter set screen.
➥ To set the [TWIN-PBT] controls to the center posi-
tions, push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec.
The variable range depends on the passband width
and mode. The edge of the variable range is half
of the passband width, and PBT is adjustable in 25
(SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes) or 100 Hz (AM mode)
steps.
• The [TWIN-PBT] controls should normally be set to
the center positions (PBT setting is cleared) when
there is no interference.
• When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed.
• Not available for FM mode.
• While rotating the [TWIN-PBT] controls, noise may
occur. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
default value.
• PBT operation example
PBT2
PBT1
PBT2
PBT1
PBT2
PBT1
IF center frequency Interference Desired signal
Passband
Both controls at
center position
Cutting the lower
passband edge
Cutting both lower and
higher passband edges
Interference InterferenceDesired signal
Passband
[TWIN-PBT]
PBT-CLR
FILTER
F-4
DEF
Shows filter width, shifting value and condition
• Filter set screen
“SHARP” is selected.
75
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ IF filter selection
The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for
each mode.
For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width
can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz
steps. A total of 41 passband widths are available.
For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set
within 50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of
32 passband widths are available.
For AM mode, the passband width can be set within
200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-
band w
idths are available.
For FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3
passband widths are available.
The filter selection is automatically memorized in
each mode.
The PBT shift frequencies are automatically mem-
orized in each filter.
D IF filter selection
q Select the desired mode.
w Push [FILTER] several times to select the IF filter
1, 2 or 3.
• The selected passband width and filter number is dis-
played in the LCD.
D Filter passband width setting (except FM
mode)
q
Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set
screen.
w Select any mode except FM.
• Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot
be set.
e Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired
IF filter.
r Push [BW] (F-1), then rotate the main dial to adjust
the desired passband width. Then push [BW] (F-1)
to set.
• While pushing and holding [BW] (F-1), rotating the
main dial also adjusts the passband width. After adjust-
ment, release [BW] (F-1) to set.
•
In SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can
be set within the following range.
50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps
600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps
• In RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within
the following range.
50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps
600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps
• In AM mode, the passband width can be set within the
following range.
200
Hz to 10 kHz
200 Hz steps
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value. (Roofing filter setting also selects a default value.)
t Repeat steps w to r if desired for other modes.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.
FILTER
F-1
BW
F-4
DEF
EXIT/SET
Main dial
Selected
IF filter
Passband
width
• During the passband width setting
The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the
passband width is changed.
This filter set screen graphically displays the
PBT shift frequencies and CW pitch operations.
76
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Blinks
D Roofing filter selection
The IC-7600 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the
1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides interfer-
ence reduction from nearby strong signals.
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set
screen.
w Select any mode except FM.
e Push [ROOFING] (F-5] to select the desired filter
width from 15 kHz, 6 kHz and 3 kHz.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
(Filter passband width setting also selects a
default value.)
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.
D DSP filter shape
The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data
and CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp.
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set
screen.
w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode.
e Push [SHAPE] (F-6) several times to select the
desired filter shape from soft and sharp.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.
The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and
50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width
setting (CW only) independently from your default
setting in filter shape set mode.
F-5F-4
DEF ROOFING
EXIT/SET
FILTER
• Filter set screen
“SHARP” is selected.
• Default roofing filter (unit: kHz)
Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3
SSB
15 15 6
RTTY
15 6 6
SSB-D
6 6 6
PSK
6 6 6
CW
6 6 6
AM
15 15 15
F-1
F-2
F-6F-4
DEF SHAPE
EXIT/SET
Main dial
FILTER
77
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
HF SSB (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
SSB-D (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF
bands.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.
CW (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
50M SSB (600Hz – ) SOFT
Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
SSB-D (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.
CW (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
78
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Filter shape set mode
The type of DSP filter shape for SSB, SSB data and
CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp.
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set
screen.
w Push and hold [SHAPE] (F-6) for 1 sec. to enter fil-
ter shape set mode.
w
Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).
e Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from
soft and sharp.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter shape set mode.
• Filter shape set mode
■ Dualwatch operation
Dualwatch monitors 2 frequencies with the same
mode simultaneously.
During dualwatch, both frequencies should be on the
same band, because the bandpass filter in the RF cir-
cuit is selected for the main readout frequency.
q Set a desired frequency into the main band.
w Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec.
• “ ” appears.
• The sub readout operating mode is equalized to the
main readout.
• Equalized receive frequency appears on the sub band
frequency readout. This quick dualwatch function can
be turned OFF in others set mode. (p. 128)
• Pushing
[DUALWATCH]
momentarily activates the
dualwatch with the previously operated frequency.
e Rotate the main dial to set another desired fre-
quency.
r Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to enables the sub
band access when changing the frequency, etc. in
sub band.
• Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] again for the main band
access.
t Adjust the [BAL] control to set a suitable signal
strength balance between the main and sub read-
out frequencies.
• S-meter shows the combined signal strength.
y To transmit on the sub readout frequency, push
[CHANGE] or [SPLIT].
NOTE:
• A beat note may be heard depending on the fre-
quency combination.
• The RIT function can be used for the main read-
out only.
• The ∂TX function can be used for the transmit
readout (main readout when the split function
OFF; sub readout when the split function ON).
[BAL] control
DUAL
WATCH
SPLIT
CHANGE
MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE
M.SCOPE
Main dial
Appears
79
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
• Scanning during dualwatch
Scanning operates only for the main readout. To
operate the scan during dualwatch, scan on the main
readout and use the sub readout for your QSO using
both dualwatch and split frequency operation.
q Program the desired programmed scan edges in
the same amateur band. See p. 101 for program-
ming.
• If you plan to operate a ∂F scan, programming the
scan edges may not be necessary.
w Push [SPLIT] to turn the split frequency function
ON.
• “ ” appears.
e Select VFO mode for the main readout.
r Set the desired operating frequency for the main
readout.
t Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec.
• “ ” appears.
• Equalized receive frequency and operating mode
appear on the sub band readout and the dualwatch
funct
ion is turned ON.
y Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
• Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to start the pro-
grammed scan or ∂F scan, respectively.
• Scan activates on the main readout between the pro-
grammed scan edges or within the ∂F span.
• Transm
itting on the sub readout stops the scan.
i To cancel the scan, push [EXIT/SET].
F-1
F-2 F-5
EXIT/SET
DUAL
WATCH
SPLIT
PROG SCAN
∂F
80
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Noise blanker
<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM
The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such
as the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is
not available for FM mode.
➥ Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker function ON
and OFF.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the noise
blanker is ON.
When using the noise blanker, received signals
may be distorted if they are excessively strong or
for other types of noise than impulse. Turn the
noise blanker OFF, or set the noise blanker thresh-
old level (see below) to a shallow position in this
case.
D NB set mode
To deal with various type of noise, attenuation level
and noise blanking duration can be set in NB set
mode.
q Push and hold [NB] for 1 sec. to enter NB set
mode.
w
Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).
e Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or
condition.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit NB set mode.
F-1
F-2 F-4
DEF
EXIT/SET
Main dial
NB
• NB set mode
NB Level
50%
Set the noise blanker threshold level from 0% to
100%.
NB Depth
8
Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.
NB Width
50
Set the blanking duration from 1 to 100.
81
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ Noise reduction
The noise reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances desired signals which are
buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise
reduction function.
q Push [NR] to turn the noise reduction ON.
• The indicator on this switch lights green.
w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduc-
tion level.
e Push [NR] to turn the noise reduction OFF.
• The indicator goes off.
Large rotations of the [NR] control results in audio
signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control
for maximum readability.
■ Dial lock function
The dial lock function prevents frequency changes
by accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock
function electronically locks the dial.
➥ Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to tog-
gle the dial lock function ON and OFF.
• The [LOCK] indicator lights when the dial lock
function is in use.
• While split frequency operation is ON, the split lock
function may be turned ON. (p. 89)
NOTE: When “LOCK/SPEECH” is selected in
[[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch] item in others set mode,
pushing [SPEECH/LOCK] activates the dial lock
function. (p. 131)
[NR]
control
NR
Noise reduction OFF Noise reduction activated
Desired
signal (CW)
Noise components
[LOCK] indicator
SPEECH
LOCK
82
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Notch function
This transceiver has auto and manual notch func-
tions.
The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically
attenuate beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if they
are moving. The manual notch can be set to attenu-
ate a frequency via the [NOTCH] control.
The auto notch can be used in SSB, AM and FM
mode.
The manual notch can be used in SSB, CW, RTTY,
PSK and AM modes.
➥ Push [NOTCH] to toggle the notch function
between auto, manual and OFF in SSB and AM
modes.
• Either auto or manual notch function can be deacti-
vated in others set mode. (p. 132)
➥ Push [NOTCH] to turn the manual notch function
ON and OFF in CW, RTTY, PSK modes.
➥ Push [NOTCH] to turn the auto notch function ON
and OFF in FM mode.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the auto
or manual notch function is ON.
• When the manual notch function is ON, push and hold
[NOTCH]
for 1 sec. to select the notch filter width for
manual notch from wide, middle and narrow.
• Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the
[NOTCH] control.
•
“
” appears when auto notch is in use.
• “
” appears when manual notch is in use.
While tuning the manual notch, noise may be
heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.
■ Auto tune function
<MODE> CW/AM
The automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre-
quency automatically when an off-frequency signal is
received within the range ±500 Hz (CW) or ±5 kHz (AM).
This function is active while in CW or AM mode is selected.
➥ Push [AUTO TUNE] to toggle the auto tune func-
tion ON or OFF.
• “ ” blinks when auto tune function is acti-
vated.
•
After 2 sec. has passed, the auto tune function stops
tuning automatically even it’s still off-frequency.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning function
may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
NOTE: The automatic tuning function does not
active on the sub band.
[NOTCH]
control
NOTCH
• Auto notch indication
Appears
• Manual notch indication
Appears
Unwanted tone frequency
Desired
signal (AF)
Desired
signal (AF)
Particular frequency is attenuated
Auto notch OFF Auto notch ON
AUTO
TUNE
Appears
83
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ VOX function
<MODE> SSB/AM/FM
The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function
switches between transmit and receive with your
voice. This function provides “hands-free” operation.
D Using the VOX function
q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).
w Push [VOX] (MF6) to turn the VOX function ON or
OFF.
• “VOX” appears while the VOX is in use.
D Adjusting the VOX function
q Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select a phone mode
(SSB, AM, FM).
w Push and hold [VOX] (MF6) for 1 sec. to enter
VOX set mode.
e Select the VOX gain item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).
r While speaking into the microphone, rotate the
main dial to the point where the transceiver is con-
tinuously transmitting.
t If the receive audio from the speaker causes the
VOX circuit to switch to, adjust the anti-VOX set-
ting to the point where speaker audio does not acti-
vate the VOX.
• Select the Anti-VOX item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).
• Rotate the main dial.
y Adjust the VOX delay for a convenient interval
before returning to receive.
u
Set the VOX voice delay if desired.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit VOX set mode.
F-1
F-2
F-4
DEF
EXIT/SET
Main dial
VOX
SSB
AM/FM
• VOX set mode screen
VOX Gain
50%
This item adjusts the VOX gain for the VOX func-
tion. Higher values make the VOX function more
sensitive to your voice.
This setting can be adjusted from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps.
Anti–VOX
50%
This item adjusts the ANTI-VOX gain for the VOX
function. Higher values make the VOX function less
sensitive to receiver output audio from a speaker or
headphones.
This setting can be adjusted from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps.
VOX Delay
0.2s
Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before
returning to receive within 0.0 to 2.0 sec. range.
VOX Voice Delay OFF
Set the VOX voice delay to prevent clipping of the
first few syllables of a transmission when switching
to transmit.
OFF, Short, Mid and Long settings are available.
When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX
monitor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio
from be echoed.
84
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Push and hold for 1 sec. to select a default value.
■ Break-in function
<MODE> CW
The break-in function is used in CW mode to auto-
matically toggle the transceiver between transmit and
receive when keying. The IC-7600 is capable of full
break-in or semi break-in.
D Semi break-in operation
During semi break-in operation, the transceiver imme-
diately transmits when keying, then returns to receive
after a pre-set delay time has passed from when you
stop keying.
q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode.
w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twice to turn the semi
break-in function ON.
• “BKIN” appears.
e Rotate [BK-IN DELAY] to set the break-in delay
time (the delay from transmit to receive).
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to
adjust the keying speed.
D Full break-in operation
During full break-in operation, the transceiver imme-
diately transmits when keying, then returns to receive
after you stop keying.
q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode.
w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twice to turn the full
break-in function ON.
• “F-BKIN” appears.
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to
adjust the keying speed.
[BK-IN DELAY] [KEY SPEED]
CW
BK-IN
[KEY SPEED]
BK-IN
CW
Appears
Appears
85
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ Speech compressor
<MODE> SSB
The speech compressor increases average RF output
power, improving signal strength and readability.
q Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB mode.
w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select
COMP TBW set screen.
e Adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC
meter reads within the ALC zone, whether or not
you speak softly or loudly.
r Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the speech compres-
sor ON.
t While speaking into the microphone, rotate the
main dial, so that the COMP meter reads within the
COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your normal
voice level.
When the COMP meter peaks exceed 20 dB,
your transmitted voice may be distorted.
y
Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to exit COMP
TBW set screen.
u Adjust the drive gain to set the ALC meter read-
ing within the 30 to 50% range of the ALC scale.
(p. 37)
■ Transmit filter width setting
<MODE> SSB
The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be
selected from wide, middle and narrow.
q Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB mode.
w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select
COMP TBW set screen.
e Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the speech compres-
sor ON or OFF.
r Push [TBW] (F-3) several times to select the
desired transmit filter width from wide, middle and
narrow.
• The filter can be independently set on the speech com-
pressor function is ON and OFF.
• The following filters are specified as the default. Each
of the filter width can be re-set in level set mode.
(p.
122)
WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz
MID : 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz
NAR : 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz
t Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to exit COMP
TBW set screen.
[MIC GAIN]
EXIT/SET
Main dial
COMP
SSB
• COMP/TBW set screen
EXIT/SET
F-3
TBW
COMP
SSB
Speech compressor is ON
Speech compressor is OFF
“WIDE” setting
86
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ ∂TX function
The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to
±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancel-
ling the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive
frequency.
q Push [∂TX] to turn ∂TX function ON.
• “ ” and the shifting frequency appear when the
function is ON.
w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.
e To reset the ∂TX frequency, push and hold
[CLEAR] for 1 sec.
• Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the ∂TX fre-
quency when the quick RIT/∂TX
clear function is ON.
(p. 132)
r To cancel the ∂TX function, push [∂TX] again.
• “ ” and the shifting frequency disappears.
When RIT and ∂TX are ON at the same time, the
[RIT/∂TX] control shifts both the transmit and
receive frequencies from the displayed frequency
at the same time.
D ∂TX monitor function
When the ∂TX function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency
directly.
✔ For your convenience— Calculate function
The shift frequency of the ∂TX function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
➥ While displaying the ∂TX shift frequency, push
and hold [∂TX] for 1 sec.
■ Monitor function
The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-
mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice
characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-
ter (p. 121).
The CW sidetone functions regardless of the
[MONITOR] switch setting.
q Push [MONITOR] to turn the monitor function
ON and OFF.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the mon-
itor function is ON.
w Push and hold [MONITOR] to monitor set mode.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the monitor level.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit monitor set mode.
NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay, turn the
monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be
echoed.
[RIT/∂TX]
∂TX
CLEAR
XFC
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-4
DEF
MONITOR
• Monitor set mode
Appears
87
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ Split frequency operation
Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and
receive in the same mode on two different frequen-
cies. Split frequency operation is performed using 2
frequencies on the main and sub readouts.
The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for
receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.
q Set 21.290 MHz (USB)
in VFO mode.
w Push [SPLIT], then push and hold [CHANGE] for 1
sec.
• The quick split function is much more convenient for
selecting the transmit frequency. See the next section
for details.
• The equalized transmit frequency and “
”
appear on the LCD.
•
[SPLIT] indicator lights.
• “
” appears to show the transmit frequency read-
out.
e While pushing and holding [XFC], rotate the main
dial to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz.
• The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-
ing [XFC].
r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit
on 21.310 MHz.
To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push
[CHANGE] to exchange the main and sub readouts.
✔ CONVENIENT
• Direct shift frequency input
The shift frequency can be entered directly.
q Push [F-INP ENT].
w
Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys.
• 1 kHz to 9.999 MHz can be set.
• When you require a negative shift direction, push
[GENE •] in
advance.
e Push [SPLIT] to input the shift frequency in the sub
readout and the split function is turned ON.
• Dualwatch function
The dualwatch function is convenient for tuning the
transmit frequency while monitoring both frequencies
used for transmitting and receiving.
• Split lock function (p. 129)
Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main
dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this,
use both the split lock and dial lock functions to
change the transmit frequency only. The split lock
function cancels the dial lock function while pushing
[XFC] during split frequency operation.
The split lock function is OFF by default, but can be
turned ON in others set mode.
Main dial
[SPLIT] indicator
SPLIT
MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE
M.SCOPE
XFC
CHANGE
• When the split function ON
• When [XFC] is pushed
• The split frequency operation is ready
88
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Quick split function
When you find a DX station, an important consider-
ation is how to set the split frequency.
When you push and hold the [SPLIT]
switch for 1
sec., the split frequency operation is turned ON, and
the sub readout frequency and operating mode is
equalized to the main readout, then enters standby
for transmit frequency input.
This shortens the time needed to begin split fre-
quency operat
ion.
The quick split function is ON by default. For your
convenience, it can be turned OFF in others set
mode. (p. 129) In this case, the [SPLIT]
switch does
not equalize the main and sub readout frequencies.
q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB)
in VFO mode.
w Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec.
• Split frequency operation is turned ON.
• [SPLIT] indicator lights.
• The sub readout frequency and operating mode is
equalized to the main readout.
• The sub readout enters standby for transmit frequency
input and “
” appears.
• During FM mode operation, the sub readout frequency
shifts from the main readout frequency according to the
others set mode setting. (p. 129)
• The tone encoder function is turned ON in FM mode.
e Rotate the main dial to set the transmit frequency;
or, input the transmit frequency using the keypad
and [F-INP ENT]; or, input a shift frequency using
the keypad and [SPLIT].
• “ ” disappears when [F-INP ENT] is pushed.
• Offset frequency setting with the keypad and [SPLIT].
[Example]
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
- Push
[1.8 1] then [SPLIT].
To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push [GENE •], [7 3] then [SPLIT].
D Split lock function
The split lock function is convenient for changing only
the transmit frequency. When the split lock function
is not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotat-
ing the main dial, changes the receive frequency. The
split lock function is OFF by default, but can be turned
ON in others set mode. (p. 129)
q While split frequency operation is ON, push and
hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to activate the
split lock function.
• [LOCK] indicator lights.
w While pushing and holding [XFC], rotate the main
dial to change the transmit frequency.
• If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating the
main dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.
Main dial
[SPLIT] indicator Keypad
SPLIT
Main dial[LOCK] indicator
SPEECH
LOCK
XFC
89
4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
■ About digital voice recorder
The IC-7600 has digital voice memories, up to 4
messages for transmit, and up to 20 messages for
receive.
A maximum message length of 30 sec. can be
recorded into receive memory (total message length
for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total mes-
sage length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded in trans-
mit memory.
The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated
CQ and exchange transmissions in contests, as well
as when making repeated calls to DX’peditions.
q Select any mode.
w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to display voice recorder
screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to display voice recorder menu.
r Push [PLAY] (F-1) or [MIC REC] (F-2) to select
the desired memory channel screen, then record
audio or playback the contents.
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit voice recorder
screen.
F-2
F-1
EXIT/SET
PLAY
REC
PLAY
VOICE
MIC REC
/
• Example— When [REC] is pushed and held for 1sec.
• Example— When [REC] is pushed momentarily
• Playing back the all contents in a channel • Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel
20 sec.
15 sec.
(default)
30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)
3 sec.
30 sec.
Push
REC
momentarily within 30 sec. after
pushing and holding
REC
for 1 sec., records
the all contents.
Push
REC
momentarily
records the contents of
the previous 15 sec.*
When
REC
is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*
from the last
REC
operation, all the contents between
REC
operations will be recorded.
Push
REC
momentarily after passing
30 sec. from pushing and holding
REC
for 1 sec., records the 30 sec. before
canceling the record.
These contents
won’t be recorded.
*The playing back time period can be changed with
“Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 97).
NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory
channels automatically.
Push and hold
REC
for 1 sec.
(starts recording)
Push
REC
momentarily Push
REC
momentarily
Push
REC
momentarily
(stops recording)
Push and hold
REC
for 1 sec.
(starts recording)
Push
REC
momentarily
(stops recording)
Push [PLAY] (F-3) momentarily.
Or, push and hold
PLAY
for 1 sec. Push
PLAY
momentarily.
*The recording time period can be changed with “Normal Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 97).
About recording received audio and playing back the contents
5
90
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Recording a received audio
Up to 20 receive voice memories are available in the
IC-7600. A total of 209 sec. of audio can be recorded
in receive messages. However, the maximum record-
able length of a single message is 30 sec.
This voice recorder records not only the received
audio, but also the information such as set operat-
ing frequency, mode, and the recording time for your
future reference.
D Basic recording
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select the desired mode.
e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears,
push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory channel.
r Push and hold [REC] for 1 sec. to start recording.
• The operating frequency, mode and current time are
programmed as the memory names automatically.
t Push [REC] momentarily to stop recording.
IMPORTANT!
Push [REC] to stop recording before, or when
30 sec. has elapsed from the start of recording.
The voice recorder memory records 30 sec. (max.)
of audio before [REC] is pushed.
For example, when recording 40 sec. of audio, the
first 10 sec. audio will be over-written with the last
10 sec., so that the total of audio recorded is only
30 sec.
When you record the 21st audio message, or
when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec., the
oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to
make room for the new audio.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) while
recording, no audio will be recorded.
D One-touch recording
To record the received signal immediately, one-touch
voice recording is available.
➥ Push [REC] momentarily to store the previous
15 sec. audio.
• The recordable time period can be set in voice set
mode. (p. 97)
F-2 F-6
EXIT/SET
VOICE
T/R
REC
The remaining time for recording
is indicated.
REC
91
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
■ Playing the recorded audio
D Basic playing
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory message (T1–T4) appears,
push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory message.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
voice memory to playback.
r Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback.
• “ ” indicators appear and the timer counts
down.
t Push [PLAY] (F-3) again to stop playback if
desired.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the
recorded contents in the message are played.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
D One-touch playing
The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be
played back without selecting voice recorder screen.
➥ Push [PLAY] momentarily to playback the last
5 sec. of the previously recorded audio.
• To playback all contents of the previously recorded
audio, push and hold [PLAY] for 1 sec.
•
“
” indicator appears.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the
recorded contents in the message are played, or after
5 sec.
• The playback time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. 97)
F-2
F-3
F-1
PLAY
EXIT/SET
T/R
F-6
VOICE
/
Appears
Appears
Counts down
PLAY
92
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Protect the recorded contents
The protect function is available to protect the
recorded contents from accidental erasure, such as
over-writing, etc.
q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
voice message.
e Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to turn the protect function
ON and OFF.
• “ ” indicator appears when the contents is protected.
r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
F-2 F-4F-1
PROTECT
EXIT/SET
■ Erasing the recorded contents
The recorded contents can be erased independently
by message.
q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
voice message to be erased.
e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback.
• “ ” indicators appear and the timer counts
down.
r Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the
contents.
• Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to release the protection in
advance if necessary.
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
F-2
F-3
F-6
F-1
PLAY
CLR
F-4
PROTECT
EXIT/SET
93
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
■ Recording a message for transmit
To transmit a message using the voice recorder,
record the desired message in advance as described
below.
The IC-7600 has digital voice memories for transmis-
sion, up to 4 messages and a total message length of
up to 99 sec. can be recorded.
D Recording
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu.
r Push [MIC REC] (F-2) to select the voice mic.
record screen.
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
message.
y While speaking into the microphone with your nor-
mal voice level, adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so
that the [MIC-REC LEVEL] indicator reads within
100%.
u Push and hold [REC] (F-4) for 1 sec. to start
recording.
• “ ” indicator appears.
• Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT].
•
Previously recorded contents are cleared.
• Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically
muted.
i Push [REC] (F-4) momentarily to stop recording.
• The recording is terminated automatically when the
remaining time becomes 0 sec.
o Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
D Confirming a message for transmit
q Perform the steps q to r as “D Recording”
above.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
message.
e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to playback the recorded con-
tents.
• “ ” indicator appears.
• Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the con-
tents.
r Push [PLAY] (F-3) again to stop playback.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the
recorded contents in the message are played.
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
F-2
F-4
F-1
REC
EXIT/SET
VOICE
MIC REC
Appears
Adjust [MIC GAIN] control so that this
indicator reads within 100%.
F-2 F-3F-1
PLAY
EXIT/SET
F-6
CLR
94
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Programming a memory name
Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric
names of up to 30 characters each.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _
–
@) and spaces can be used. (See the table below.)
q Record a message as described in page 94.
w During the voice mic. record screen indication,
push [NAME] (F-5) to enter memory name edit
condition.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
e Push [T1..T4] (F-6) several times to select the
desired voice message.
r Input the desired character by rotating the main
dial or by pushing the band key for number input.
• Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and
small letters.
•
Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numer-
als and symbols.
•
Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement.
•
Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
•
Push [SPACE] (F-4) to
input a space.
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can
also enter numerals.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.
• The cursor disappears.
y Repeat steps e to t to program another voice
message’s name, if desired.
u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
• Usable characters
Key selection Editable characters
A to Z (capital letters)
a to z (small letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ¥ ? “ ‘ ` ^ + – ✱ /
. , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _
–
@
✔ For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory name can also
be edited from the keyboard.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEL
SPACE
F-5 F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123 abc
T1..T4
Keypad
NAME
• Voice mic. record screen
Voice memory name editing example
95
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
■ Sending a recorded message
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select a phone mode by pushing [SSB] or
[AM/FM].
e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• If the receive voice message appears, push [T/R] (F-6)
to select TX message (T1–T4).
r Push the desired message switch, [T1] (F-1) to
[T4] (F-4), momentarily to transmit the contents.
• The transceiver transmits automatically.
• “
” indicator appears and the memory timer
counts down.
•
You hear the transmitted message from the speaker as
the default. This can be turned OFF in voice set mode.
(p. 97)
t Push the selected message switch, [T1] (F-1) to
[T4] (F-4), again to stop, if desired.
• The transceiver returns to receive automatically when
all of the recorded contents in the message are trans-
m
itted.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice memory
screen.
For your information
When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] con-
nector on the front panel, or one of [F1]−[F4] key of
the keyboard that is connected to the [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel is pushed,
the recorded
message, T1–T4, can be transmitted without open-
ing the voice recorder screen.
See pages 18, 133, 134 for details.
D Transmit level setting
q Call up the voice recorder screen as described as
above.
w Push [TX LEV.] (F-5) to select the voice memory
transmit level set condition.
e Push the desired message switch, [T1] (F-1) to
[T4] (F-4), momentarily to transmit the contents.
• The transceiver transmits automatically.
• “
” indicator appears and the memory timer
counts down.
r Rotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice
level.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-6) for 1 sec. to select the
default condition.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the voice recorder
screen.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
T3
T/RT4T2T1
SSB
AM/FM
VOICE
Appears Counts down
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
T3
T4T2T1
F-5
F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
TX LEV.
DEF
Appears
Adjust the transmit voice level
from 0 to 100 %.
96
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Voice set mode
Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and
normal recording times for voice recorder.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu.
r Push [SET] (F-6) to select voice set mode screen.
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
item.
y Rotate the main dial to set the desired condition or
value.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default condition or value.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice set mode
screen.
F-1 F-2
F-4 F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
DEF
SET
VOICE
/
Auto Monitor ON
Turn on the automatic monitor function for recorded
audio contents transmission.
• ON : Monitors transmit audio automatically when
sending a recorded audio.
• OFF : Monitors transmit audio only when the mon-
itor function is in use.
Short Play Time 5s
Set the desired time period for one-touch playback
(when [PLAY] is pushed momentarily).
• 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(default: 5 sec.)
Normal Rec Time 15s
Set the desired time period for one-touch recording
(when [REC] is pushed momentarily).
• 5 to 15 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(default: 15 sec.)
97
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
■ Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory
D Saving the received audio memory
The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into
the USB-Memory.
q During voice recorder RX memory screen display,
push [SAVE] (F-5) to select voice file save screen.
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX message (T1–T4) appears, push
[T/R] (F-6)
to select RX message.
w Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition.
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then
rotate the main dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^
– ( ) { } _
–
@ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈]
(F-2)
to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3)
to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
i
nsert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-4) to select the upper directory.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3)
to select folder in the
same directory.
• Push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
folder
in the directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete
the folder.
• Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
in
g a new folder. (Edit the name with the same
manner as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file
name.
e Push [SAVE] (F-5).
• After the saving is completed, return to voice recorder
RX memory screen automatically.
D Saving the TX memory
The TX memory contents can also be saved into the
USB-Memory. However, the contents are saved with
the message list, set mode conditions, etc. at the
same time. See page 139 for details.
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
EDIT
F-4
SAVE
F-6
F-5
T/R
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEL
SPACE
Symbol ABC
123
F-1
EXIT/SET
DIR/FILE
Main dial
• Voice recorder RX memory screen
• Voice file save screen— file name edit
F-2 F-4F-3
REN DEL
MAKE
• While saving
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the file name can also be
edited from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is
required.
98
5
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
6
99
MEMORY OPERATION
■ Memory channels
The transceiver has 101 memory channels. Memory
mode is very useful for quick change to often-used
frequencies.
All 101 memory channels are tunable which means
the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily
with the main dial, etc. in memory mode.
MEMORY
CHANNEL
MEMORY
CHANNEL
NUMBER
CAPABILITY
TRANSFER
TO VFO
OVER-
WRITING
CLEAR
Regular memory
channels
1–99
One
frequency and one mode in each
memory channel.
Yes Yes Yes
Scan edge
memory
channels
P1, P2
One frequency and one mode in
each
memory channel as scan edges for
programmed scan.
Yes Yes No
■ Memory channel selection
D Using the [∫]/[√] keys
q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select memory mode.
w Push [∫]/[√] several times to select the desired
memory channel.
• Push and hold [∫]/[√] for continuous selection.
• [UP] and [DN] on the m
icrophone can also be used.
e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO] again.
D Using the keypad
q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select memory mode.
w Push [F-INP ENT].
e Push the desired memory channel number using
the keypad.
• Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2,
respectively.
r Push [∫] or [√] to set the memory channel.
[EXAMPLE]
To select the memory channel 3;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [7 3], then push [∫] or [√].
To select the memory channel 12;
-
Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [3.5 2], then push [∫] or
[√].
To select the scan edge channel P1;
-
Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [50 0], then push
[∫] or [√].
To select the scan edge channel P2;
-
Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [1.8 1], then push
[∫] or [√].
VFO/MEMO
VFO/MEMO
Keypad
F-INP
ENT
■ Memory list screen
The memory list screen simultaneously shows 7
memory channels and their programmed contents. 13
memory channels can be displayed in the wide mem-
ory list screen.
You can select a desired memory channel from the
memory list screen.
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list
screen.
• Pushing [WIDE] (F-6) switches the standard and wide
screens.
e While pushing and holding [SET] (F-2), rotate the
main dial to select the desired memory channel.
• [∫] and [√] can also be used.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.
MEMORY
WIDE
SET
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-2 F-4
F-6
• Memory list screen
D Confirming programmed memory channels
q Select memory list screen as described above.
w While pushing [ROLL] (F-1), rotate the main dial to
scroll the screen.
e Push [SET] (F-2) to select the highlighted memory
channel, if desired.
• “≈” appears beside the selected memory channel num-
ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory
channel contents are displayed below the frequency
readout.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.
SET
EXIT/SET
Main dial
F-2
ROLL
F-1
100
6
MEMORY OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Memory channel programming
Memory channel programming can be preformed
either in VFO mode or in memory mode.
D Programming in VFO mode
q Set the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-
ter width in VFO mode.
w Push [∫]/[√] several times to select the desired
memory channel.
• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the
desired channel. (p. 100)
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
•
“--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel (and does not have contents).
e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis-
played frequency, operating mode, etc., into the
memory channel.
D Programming in memory mode
q Select the desired memory channel with [∫]/[√] in
memory mode.
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout instead of the frequency readout.
• No indication appears if the selected memory channel
is a blank channel (and does not have contents).
w Set the desired frequency and operating mode in
memory mode.
• To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry
with the keypad or memo pads, etc. (p. 28)
e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis-
played frequency and operating mode into the
memory channel.
MW
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory channel 12.
Push for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
7
3
SSB
MW
or
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory channel 19.
Push for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
SSB
MW
thenor
21
7
101
6
MEMORY OPERATION
■ Frequency transfers
The frequency and operating mode in a memory
channel can be transferred to the VFO.
Frequency transfers can be performed in either VFO
mode or memory mode.
D Transferring in VFO mode
This is useful for transferring programmed contents to
a VFO.
q Select VFO mode with [VFO/MEMO].
w Select the memory channel to be transferred with
[∫]/[√].
• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the
desired channel.
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
•
“--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel. In this case transferring is not possible.
e Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer
the frequency and operating mode.
• Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on
the frequency readout.
D Transferring in memory mode
This is useful for transferring frequency and operating
mode while operating in memory mode.
When you have changed the frequency or operat-
ing mode in the selected memory channel:
• Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are
transferred.
• Programmed frequency, mode and filter in the
memory channel are not transferred, and they
remain in the memory channel.
q Select the memory channel to be transferred with
[∫]/[√] in memory mode.
• Then, set the frequency or operating mode if required.
w Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer
the frequency, mode and filter.
• Displayed frequency, mode and filter are transferred to
the VFO.
e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO]
momentarily.
TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE
Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW
Push for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
or
VFO/MEMO
TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE
VFO frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW
Push for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
Programmed contents appear.
VFO/MEMO
102
6
MEMORY OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Memory names
All memory channels (including scan edges) can be
tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-
ters each.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _
–
@) and space can be used.
D Editing (programming) memory names
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w
Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen.
e Select the desired memory channel with [∫]/[√].
r Push [NAME] (F-4) to edit memory channel name.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
• Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be
edited.
t Input the desired character by rotating the main
dial or by pushing the keypad for number input.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols.
•
Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement.
•
Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
•
Push [SPACE] (F-4) to
input a space.
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can
also enter numerals.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.
• The cursor disappears.
u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory
channel’s name, if desired.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.
✔ For your convenience
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory name can also
be edited from the keyboard.
■ Memory clearing
Any unused memory channels can be cleared.
The cleared memory channels become blank chan-
nels.
q Select memory mode with [VFO/MEMO].
w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list
screen.
e Select the desired memory channel with [∫]/[√].
r Push and hold [CLR] (F-5) for 1 sec. to clear the
contents.
• The programmed frequency, operating mode and filter
disappear.
t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e
and r.
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEL SPACE
F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
Symbol ABC
123 abc
Keypad
MEMORY
NAME
F-5F-4
CLR
VFO/MEMO
MEMORY
Push for 1 sec.
Beep
Beep
Beep
(CLR)
F-5
103
6
MEMORY OPERATION
■ Memo pads
The transceiver has a memo pad function to store
frequency and operating mode for easy writing and
recalling. The memo pads are separate from memory
channels.
The default number of memo pads is 5, however, this
can be increased to 10 in set mode if desired. (p. 132)
Memo pads are convenient when you want to mem-
orize a frequency and operating mode temporarily,
such as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or
when a desired station is busy for a long time and you
want to temporarily search for other stations.
Use the transceiver’s memo pads instead of relying
on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.
MP-RMP-W
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads
You can store the readout frequency and operating
mode by pushing [MP-W].
When you store the 6th frequency and operating
mode, the oldest stored frequency and operating
mode are automatically erased to make room for the
new settings.
Each memo pad must have its own unique combi-
nation of frequency and operating mode; memo
pads having identical settings cannot be written.
MP-W
Newest
Erased
Oldest
In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be erased
when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written.
D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad
You can call up the desired frequency and operat-
ing mode of a memo pad by pushing [MP-R] several
times.
• Both VFO and memory modes can be used.
• The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting
from the most recently written.
When you call up a frequency and an operating mode
from memo pads with [MP-R], the previously dis-
played frequency and operating mode are automat-
ically stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and
operating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled
by pushing [MP-R] several times.
• You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different
frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the tempo-
rary pad) are called up by [MP-R].
If you change the frequency or operating mode
called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc.,
the frequency and operating mode in the tempo-
rary pad are erased.
MP-R
Newest
Oldest
MEMO PADS
MP-R
104
6
MEMORY OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Scan types
PROGRAMMED SCAN
Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies
(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2).
This scan operates in VFO mode.
SELECT MEMORY SCAN
Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.
∂F SCAN
Repeatedly scans within ∂F span area.
This scan operates in memory mode.This scan operates in memory mode.
This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.
Scan
Scan edge
P1 or P2
Scan edge
P2 or P1
Jump
MEMORY SCAN
Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.
Mch 1
�
1
Mch 5
�1
Mch 2
�
2
Mch 3
�1
Mch 4
Mch 6
�
3
Mch 7
�1
Mch 99
�1
Mch 1
�
1
Mch 5
�1
Mch 2
�
2
Mch 3
�1
Mch 4
Mch 6
�
3
Mch 7
�1
Mch 99
�1
Blank channel Blank channel
ScanScan
–
∂F frequency +∂F frequency
Start frequency
Jump
*“�1,” “�2” and “�3” show that the channel
is specified as the select memory.
*“�1,” “�2” and “�3” show that the channel
is specified as the select memory.
■ Preparation
• Channels
For programmed scan:
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem-
ory channels P1 and P2. (p. 101)
For ∂F scan:
Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range)
in the scan screen.
For memory scan:
Program 2 or more memory channels except scan
edge memory channels.
For select memory scan:
D
esignate 2 or more memory channels as select
memory channels. To designate the channel as a
select memory channel, choose a memory channel,
then push [SELECT] (F-3) in the scan screen (mem-
ory mode) or in the memory list screen.
• Scan resume ON/OFF
You can select the scan to resume or cancel when
detecting a signal in scan set mode. Scan resume ON/
OFF must be set before performing a scan. See p. 106
for ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition details.
• Scan speed
Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or
low, in scan set mode. See p. 106 for details.
• Squelch condition
❍ Scan starts with squelch open
For programmed scan:
When
 tuning step is 1 kHz or less:
The scan continues until it is stopped manually— it
does not pause* even if signals are detected.
* The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and
then opened (scan resumes after 10 sec. has passed
when
the scan resume is ON; scan is cancelled when
the scan resume is OFF).
When tuning step is more than 5 kHz:
The scan pauses on each step when the scan
resume is ON; not applicable when the scan
resume is OFF.
For memory scan:
Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume
i
s ON; not applicable when the scan resume is OFF.
❍ Scan starts with squelch closed
Scan stops when a signal is detected.
• If the scan resume is set to ON in scan set mode, the scan
pauses for 10 sec. when detecting a signal, then resumes.
When a signal disappears while scan is paused, scan
resumes 2 sec. later.
• The scan function can be used on the main read-
out only.
• You can perform a scan while operating on a fre-
quency using the dualwatch or split functions.
7
105
SCANS
■ Scan set mode
Scan speed and the scan resume condition can be
set using the scan set mode.
q Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan screen.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select scan set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu.
F-1 F-2 F-4
EXIT/SET
Main dial
DEF
F-5
F-6
SETSCAN
Scan Speed HIGH
Select the desired scan speed from high and low. • HIGH : scan is faster.
• LOW : scan is slower.
Scan Resume ON
Set the scan resume function ON and OFF. • ON : When detecting a signal, scan pauses for
10 sec., then resumes. When a signal dis-
appears, scan resumes 2 sec. later.
• OFF : When detecting a signal, cancels scanning.
106
7
SCANS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Programmed scan operation
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select VFO mode.
e Select the desired operating mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
• See p. 105 for squelch condition.
• If the [RF/SQL]
control function is set as “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK
modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)
y Push [PROG] (F-1) to start the programmed scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
u When the scan detects a signal, scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status.
i To cancel the scan, push [PROG] (F-1).
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
o Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall
the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if
desired.
If the same frequencies are programmed into the
scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-
grammed scan will not start.
■ ∂F scan operation
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select VFO mode or a memory channel.
e Select the desired operating mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
• See p. 105 for squelch condition.
• If the [RF/SQL]
control function is set as “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK
modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)
y Set the ∂F span by pushing [∂F SPAN] (F-4).
• ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz,
±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.
u Rotate the main dial to set a center frequency of
the ∂F span.
i Push [∂F] (F-2) to start the ∂F scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while scanning.
o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status.
!0 To cancel the scan, push [∂F] (F-2).
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
!1 Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall
the frequency that was set before starting the scan.
F-1 F-5
EXIT/SET
Main dial
[RF/SQL]
PROG SCAN
RECALL
F-2 F-4
∂F SPAN∂F
F-5
EXIT/SET
[RF/SQL]
SCAN
RECALL
/
107
7
SCANS
■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan
In fine scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed
decreases when the squelch opens, but the trans-
ceiver keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step
shifts from 50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
e Set for programmed scan or ∂F scan as described
on previous page.
r Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to start a scan.
• “ ” or “ ” and decimal
points blink while scanning.
t Push [FINE] (F-3) to start a fine scan.
•
“ ” or “ ”
blinks instead of “
” or “ , ”
respectively.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed
decreases but scan does not stop.
u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to stop the scan;
push [FINE] (F-3) to cancel the fine scan.
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
i Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall
the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if
desired.
F-1 F-5
EXIT/SET
Main dial
PROG SCAN
RECALL
F-3
F-2
∂F
FINE
108
7
SCANS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Memory scan operation
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
• See p. 105 for squelch condition.
• If the [RF/SQL]
control function is set as “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK
modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)
t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
u To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1) .
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
2 or more memory channels must be programmed
for memory scan to start.
■ Select memory scan operation
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
• See p. 105 for squelch condition.
• If the [RF/SQL]
control function is set as “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK
modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)
t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
y Push [SEL No.] (F-4) several times to select the
select scan number from
★
1,
★
2,
★
3 and
★
1,2,3.
u Push [SELECT] (F-3) to start select memory scan;
push [SELECT] (F-3) again to return to memory
scan, if desired.
• “ ” blinks instead of
“
” during select memory scan.
i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
o To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1).
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
2 or more memory channels must be designated
as select memory channels, as well as the same
select scan channel number, for select memory
scan to start.
F-1 F-5
EXIT/SET
Main dial
[RF/SQL]
SCANMEMO
F-3
SELECT
F-1
F-4 F-5
EXIT/SET
Main dial
[RF/SQL]
SCAN
MEMO
SEL No.
109
7
SCANS
■ Setting select memory channels
D Setting in scan screen
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
r Select the desired memory channel to set as a
select memory channel.
• [∫]/[√] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.
(p. 99)
t
Push [SELECT]
(F-3)
several times to set the
memory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3
or not.
• “★1,” “★2” or “★3” appears on the LCD to show that
the channel is specified as the select memory.
y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scan screen.
D Setting in memory list screen
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list
screen.
e Rotate the main dial while pushing [ROLL] (F-1) or
[SET] (F-2) to select the desired memory channel.
• [∫]/[√] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.
(p. 99)
r Push [SELECT] (F-3) several times to set the
memory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3
or not.
• “★1,” “★2” or “★3” appears on the LCD to show that
the channel is specified as the select memory.
t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.
D Erasing the select scan setting
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list
screen, or push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan
screen.
e Push and hold [SELECT] (F-3) for 1 sec. to display
memory select all clear window.
r
Push one of the following keys to clear all select
scan settings.
[★1] (F-1) : Clears all ★1 settings.
[★2] (F-2) : Clears all ★2 settings.
[★3] (F-3) : Clears all ★3 settings.
[★1,2,3] (F-4) : Clears all select settings.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.
EXIT/SET
F-3
F-5F-1 F-2
VFO/MEMO
SCAN
SELECT
F-4
MEMORY
ROLL SET
• Scan screen
• Memory list screen
F-5
SCAN
F-3
SELECT
F-1
F-2 F-3
★1★1 ★2 ★3
F-4
★1,2,3
F-4
MEMORY
EXIT/SET
110
7
SCANS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Tone scan
The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a
received signal. By monitoring a signal that is being
transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can
determine the tone frequency required to access the
repeater.
q Set the desired frequency or memory channel to
be checked for a tone frequency.
w Push [AM/FM] several times to select FM mode.
e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter
tone frequency screen.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to check the repeater
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency, respec-
tively.
t Push [T-SCAN] (F-6) to start the tone scan.
• “SCAN” blinks while scanning.
y When a matching tone frequency is detected, the
tone scan pauses.
• The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory
channel. Program the memory channel to store the
tone frequency permanently.
•
The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.
u To stop the scan, push [T-SCAN] (F-6).
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default frequency.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit tone frequency screen.
F-1 F-2
EXIT/SET
AM/FM
TONE
T-SCAN
DEF
F-4
F-6
111
7
SCANS
■ Automatic antenna selection
The transceiver covers 0.03–60 MHz over 10 bands.
Each band key has a band memory which can mem-
orize a selected antenna (ANT1, ANT2, ANT1/RX
antenna and ANT2/RX antenna). When you change
the operating frequency beyond a band, the previ-
ously used antenna is automatically selected. This
function is convenient when you use 2 or 3 antennas.
To use the band memory, enter set mode and con-
firm that “Auto” is selected as the [ANT] switch item.
(p. 130)
• Antenna selection mode: “Auto” (default)
The antenna tuner ON/OFF condition is also memo-
rized in the band memory.
[Example]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT1], a 21/28/50 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT2]. When the antenna selector function is set to
“Auto,” an antenna is automatically selected when the
transceiver changes bands.
• Antenna selection mode: “Manual”
[ANT] (MF1) functions, however, band memory does
not function. In this case, you must select an antenna
manually.
When using an external antenna selector for more
than 3 antennas (except for receive antenna),
“Manual” should be selected as the [ANT] switch set
mode item. (p. 130)
NOTE: When “Auto” or “Manual” is selected, the
antenna tuner ON/OFF condition is consistent with
[ANT] (MF1).
• Antenna selection mode: “OFF”
[ANT] (MF1) does not function and [ANT1] is always
selected.
3.5/7 MHz
bands
21/28/50 MHz
bands
RX
only
ANT1 ANT2
RX ANT
IN
ANT
8
112
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Antenna tuner operation
The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the
transceiver to the connected antenna automatically.
After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable capac-
itor settings are memorized as a preset point for each
frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you
change the frequency range, the variable capacitors are
automatically preset to the memorized setting.
CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON
when no antenna is connected. This will damage
the transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.
✔ For your convenience
When you purchase a brand-new antenna, or you want
to change the antenna settings, you can erase the all
of the internal antenna tuner preset points with “Tuner
Preset Memory Clear” in others set mode. (p. 130)
D Tuner operation
➥ Push [TUNER] to turn the internal antenna tuner
ON. The antenna is tuned automatically when the
antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.
• When the tuner is ON, the indicator on the switch
lights green.
• While tuning, the indicator on the switch blinks.
D Manual tuning
During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal
tuner may not automatically tune correctly. In such
cases, manual tuning is helpful.
➥ Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec., to start man-
ual tuning.
• A sidetone is emitted and the indicator on the
switch blinks red while tuning.
• If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than
1.5:1 after 20 sec. of tuning, the indicator on the
switch goes out.
NOTES:
• NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-
nected to antenna port in use.
• When 2 antennas are connected, select the
antenna to be used with [ANT] (MF1).
• If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tun-
ing farther than 100 kHz from an antenna’s pro-
grammed preset point, push and hold [TUNER] for
1 sec. to start manual tuning.
• The internal tuner may not be able to tune in
AM mode. In such cases, push and hold [TUNER]
for 1 sec. to manually tune.
TUNER
113
8
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
❍ If the tuner cannot tune the antenna
Check the following and try again:
•
the [ANT] connector selection.
• the antenna connection and feedline.
• the untuned antenna SWR. (Less than 3:1 for HF
bands; Less than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band)
• the transmit power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for
50 MHz band)
• the power source voltage/capacity.
If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1
after check
ing the above, perform the following:
• repeat manual tuning several times.
• adjust the antenna feedline length. (This is effective
for higher frequencies in some cases.)
Even if the manual tune does not tune the antenna and
the tuner turns OFF at the first time, it may tune the
antenna at the second time.
❍ Tuning a narrow bandwidth antenna
Some antennas, especially for the low bands, have
a narrow bandwidth. These antennas may not be
tuned beyond the edge of their operating bandwidth,
therefore, tune such an antenna as follows:
[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which
has an SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and
an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz.
q Set 3.55 MHz and push and hold [TUNER] for
1 sec. to start manual tuning.
w Set 3.80 MHz and push and hold [TUNER] for
1 sec. to start manual tuning.
■ Optional external tuner operation
• AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
The AH-4 matches the IC-7600 to a long wire antenna
more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and above).
• See p. 18 for the transceiver and AH-4 connection.
• See the AH-4 instruction manual for AH-4 installa-
tion and antenna connection details.
AH-4 setting example:
For mobile operation
For outdoor operation
Long wire
Optional AH-2b
antenna element
R DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE!
NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning
or transmitting.
NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna wire.
The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.
NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is not grounded.
Transmitting before tuning may damage the trans-
ce
iver. Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a
½λ long wire or multiple of the operating frequency.
When connecting the AH-4, the antenna connector
assignments are [ANT2] for the internal tuner and
[ANT1] for the AH-4. The antenna indicator in the
LCD displays “ANT1(EXT)” when the AH-4 is con-
nected and selected.
• AH-4 operation
Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to
re-tune the antenna before transmitting when you
change the frequency— even slightly.
q Set the desired frequency in an HF or 50 MHz
band for use with the AH-4.
• The AH-4 will not operate on frequencies outside
of ham bands.
w Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec.
• The indicator on the switch blinks while tuning.
TUNER
e The indicator on the switch lights constantly when
tuning is complete.
• When the connected wire cannot be tuned, the
indicator on the switch goes out and the AH-4 is
bypassed. At that point the antenna wire connec-
tion is to the transceiver directly, and not via the
AH-4 antenna tuner.
r To bypass the AH-4 manually, push [TUNER].
NOTE: PTT tuner function is also available. See
p. 129 for details.
• Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1/EURO
When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-
PW1/EURO’s tuner, tune with the external antenna
tuner, while the internal tuner is turned OFF. After tun-
ing is completed, turn the internal tuner ON.
Otherwise, both tuners tune simultaneously and cor-
rect tuning may not be obtained.
See the instruction manual included with each
antenna tuner for their respective operations.
114
8
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
• Automatic tuner start (HF bands only)
If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions
of VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start func-
tion and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates
the tuner automatically when the SWR is high.
This function is controlled in set mode. (p. 129).
• The tuner may not be activated if the TX power is not
output stably longer than the specified time period as
SSB or CW mode operation.
• PTT tuner start
Tuning of the internal*/external antenna tuner starts
when [PTT] is pushed on a new frequency (more than
1% from last-tuned frequency). This function removes
the “push and hold [TUNER]” operation and activates
for the first transmission on a new frequency.
*Tuning starts if the internal antenna tuner is ON.
This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 129).
9
115
CLOCK AND TIMERS
■ Clock set mode
F-1 F-2 F-4
F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
SET
TIME
CLOCK
/
The IC-7600 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour
clock (accuracy ±75 sec. per month) with daily power
ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these timer
functions, set the current date and time.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select time set mode.
r Push [CLOCK] (F-1) to select clock set mode.
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
item, then rotate the main dial to set or select the
desired value or condition.
• Pushing [Ω ≈] (F-3) operation may be necessary for
some items.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4)
to select a default condition
or value.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit time set mode.
Date
2000
–
1
–
1 ( Sat )
Sets the date.
z
Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select between the year and the
month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them.
• The date setting and “DATE-set Push [SET]” indica-
tion blink.
x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the date.
Time (Now) 0:00
Sets the local time.
z Rotate the ma
in dial to set the local time.
• The time setting and “TIME-set Push [SET]” indication
blink.
x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the time.
CLOCK2 Function ON
Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF.
CLOCK2 is convenient to indicate UTC or other
country’s local time, etc.
• ON : The CLOCK2 indicator is displayed below
the local time indication.
• OFF : The CLOCK2 indicator does not display.
CLOCK2 Offset ± 0:00
Sets the desired off-set time period for CLOCK2 dis-
play within –24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps.
CLOCK2 Name UTC
Sets the desired 3-character name for CLOCK2.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some sym-
bols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦
_
–
@) and spaces can be used.
z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edit condition.
• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.
x Push [ABC]/[abc] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then rotate
the main dial to select the character.
•
Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
•
Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement.
• Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
•
Push [SPACE] (F-4) to
input a space.
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can
also enter numerals.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.
116
9
CLOCK AND TIMERS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Daily timer setting
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3 F-5
TIMER2TIMER1 TIMER5
TIMER4
TIMER3
F-2 F-4
F-6
TIME
EXIT/SET
Main dial
SET
TIMER
• Timer set mode screen
• During [Timer1] is selected
F-1 F-2 F-4 F-6
SET
CLR
The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-
ically on the specified day and time, with the specified
frequency settings.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select time set mode.
r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select timer set mode.
t Push one of [TIMER1] (F-1) to [TIMER5] (F-5) to
select the desired timer.
y Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON
and OFF.
u Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate
the main dial to select the desired day of the week.
• Select “– – –” not to specify the day of the week. The
timer will function every day in this case.
• Once a day of the week is selected, push [CLR] (F-4)
to select “– – –.”
i Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “REPEAT” cell, then
rotate the main dial to select the repeat function
ON and OFF.
• ON : The timer functions every selected day of
the week (repeats).
• OFF : The timer does not repeat.
o Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “ON” cell, then rotate
the main dial to set the desired transceiver power
ON time.
• When using power OFF timer only, push [CLR] (F-4)
to select “– – – –.” This setting cannot be set when the
power OFF timer is set to “– – – –.”
!0 Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate
the main dial to set the desired transceiver power
OFF time.
• When using power ON timer only, push [CLR] (F-4) to
select “– – – –.” This setting cannot be set when the
power ON timer is set to “– – – –.”
!1 Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “Mch” cell, then rotate
the main dial to select the desired memory channel
number.
•
If using the currently set VFO condition, push
[CLR] (F-4)
to select “– – –.”
!2 Push [SET] (F-6) to set the timer.
• The timer indicator appears.
!3 Repeat steps t to !2 to set other timers, if desired.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.
■ Setting sleep timer
F-2 F-4
F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
TIMER
SET
SLEEP
/
TIME CLR
/
TIMER
POWER
• Sleep timer set condition
The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF
automatically after passing the set period. The timer
can be set to 5–120 min. in 5 min. steps.
The sleep timer function counts the ‘minute’ units,
and does not count the ‘second’ units. For exam-
ple, when the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59,
First one minute past for just 1 sec. The maximum
error is therefore 59 sec. This is normal, not a mal-
function.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select time set mode.
r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select timer set mode.
t Push [SLEEP] (F-6) to select the sleep timer set
condition.
• “– – –” blinks.
y Set the desired time period using the main dial.
• “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blinks.
• Push [CLR] (F-4) to select “– – –” to cancel the sett
ing.
u Push [SET] (F-6) to set the time.
• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the setting.
• The timer indicator appears.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.
o The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF
after the sleep timer period elapses.
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.
• Push [POWER]
momentarily to cancel the sleep timer,
if desired.
■ Timer operation
TIMER
POWER
q Preset the daily timer as described on previously to
turn the timer function ON.
• The timer indicator appears.
w Push and hold [POWER] for 1 sec. to turn the
power OFF.
• The indicator on this switch lights red when the timer
function is ON.
e When the set time arrives, the power is automati-
cally turned ON.
r The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF
after the power-off period elapses.
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.
• Push [POWER]
momentarily to turn the timer function
OFF, if desired.
Timer action in the timer set screen must be
selected ON to enable timer operation, described
in page 116 step y.
117
9
CLOCK AND TIMERS
Appears
■ Set mode description
Set mode is used for programming infrequently
changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-
7600 has a level set mode, display set mode, time
set mode, accessory set mode, others set mode and
USB-Memory set menu.
D Set mode operation
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
F-5 F-6
LEVEL OTHERSTIMEDISPACC
EXIT/SET
USB
SET
F-6
• Set mode screen
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
F-6
Main dial
WIDE
DEF
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
set mode menu screen.
e Push [LEVEL] (F-1), [ACC] (F-2), [DISP] (F-3),
[TIME] (F-4), [OTHERS] (F-5) or [USB] (F-6) to
enter the desired set mode.
r For level, accessory, display and Others set mode,
push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle wide and normal
screen.
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
item, then rotate the main dial to adjust/select the
desired value or condition.
• Pushing [Ω ≈] (F-3) operation may be necessary for
some items.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4)
select a default condition or
value.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.
10
118
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Screen arrangement
• Set mode menu screen (p. 118)
• Level set mode (p. 120)
• ACC set mode (p. 124)
• Time set mode (p. 115)
• Display set mode (p. 126)
• Others set mode (p. 128)
• USB-Memory set menu (p. 136)
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6F-2
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
119
10
SET MODE
■ Level set mode
SSB RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in SSB mode. (default: OFF)
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’
SSB RX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
SSB RX Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in
SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
AM RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in AM mode. (default: OFF)
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’
AM RX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
AM RX Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
FM RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in FM mode. (default: OFF)
NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’
FM RX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
FM RX Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
☞ Continues to the next page.
120
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Level set mode (Continued)
CW RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in CW mode. (default: OFF)
RTTY RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in RTTY mode. (default: OFF)
PSK RX HPF/LPF
– – – – – – –
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in PSK mode. (default: OFF)
SSB TX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
SSB TX Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in
SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
AM TX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
AM TX Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
FM TX Tone (Bass)
0
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
FM TX Tone (Treble)
0
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM
mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
121
10
SET MODE
SSB TBW (WIDE)
100 – 2900
Sets the transmission passband width to a wide set-
ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies.
• Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz
• Higher freq. :
2500, 2700, 2800 and
2900 Hz (default)
SSB TBW (MID)
300 – 2700
Sets the transmission passband width to a middle
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies.
• Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz
• Higher freq. :
2500, 2700 (default), 2800
and 2900 Hz
SSB TBW (NAR)
500 – 2500
Sets the transmission passband width to a narrow
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies.
• Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)
• Higher freq. :
2500 (default), 2700, 2800
and 2900 Hz
Drive Gain
50
%
Sets the drive gain level from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%)
While talking into the microphone, keying down or
transmitting, rotate the main dial so that the ALC
meter reading is between 30% to 50% of the ALC
scale. (p. 37)
The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB
mode with speech compressor OFF.
Speech Level
50
%
Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from
0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%)
Side Tone Level
50
%
Sets the sidetone output level from 0% to 100% in
1% steps. (default: 50%)
Side Tone Level Limit
ON
Turns the sidetone output level limiting capability ON
and OFF. (default: ON)
When this item is set to ON, the CW sidetone is
linked to the [AF] control until rotation of the [AF]
control reaches to the specified level—further rota-
tio
n will not increase the volume of the CW sidet-
ones.
• OFF : CW sidetone level is linked to the [AF] con-
trol.
• ON
: CW sidetone level is limited with the [AF]
control.
☞ Continues to the next page.
122
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Level set mode (Continued)
Beep Level
50
%
Sets the beep output level from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%)
Beep Level Limit
ON
Turns the beep tone output level limiting capabil-
ity ON and OFF for the confirmation and band edge
beep tones. (default: ON)
When this item is set to ON, the beep tones are
linked to the [AF] control until rotation of the [AF]
control reaches to the specified level—further rota-
t
ion will not increase the volume of the beep tones.
• OFF : Beep level is linked to the [AF] control.
• ON : Beep level is limited with the [AF] control.
123
10
SET MODE
■ ACC set mode
USB Audio SQL
OFF (OPEN)
Sets the squelch condition of the USB audio which
is output from the [USB] (B) connector on the rear
panel.
The same audio signals are output from [USB] (B)
and the ACC sockets.
• The beep tones and the voice synthesizer announce-
ments are not output.
•
The received audio output level cannot be adjusted with
the [AF] control.
• OFF (OPEN) : The received audio is always output
regardless of the squelch condition.
(default)
• ON : The received audio is output accord-
ing to the squelch condition (open/
close).
USB MOD Level
50
%
Sets the input modulation level of the [USB] (B) con-
nector from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%)
DATA OFF MOD
MIC,ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data mode is not in use.
• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].
• ACC : Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
(pin 4). (default)
• USB : Use the signals from [USB] (B).
DATA1 MOD
ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 1 mode (D1) is in use.
• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].
• ACC : Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
(default)
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
(pin 4).
• USB : Use the signals from [USB] (B).
DATA2 MOD
MIC,ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 2 mode (D2) is in use.
• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC].
• ACC : Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
(pin 4). (default)
• USB : Use the signals from [USB] (B).
DATA3 MOD
MIC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 3 mode (D3) is in use.
• MIC : Use the signals from [MIC]. (default)
• ACC : Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
(pin 4).
• USB : Use the signals from [USB] (B).
☞ Continues to the next page.
124
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ ACC set mode (Continued)
SEND Relay Type
Lead
Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from
Lead and MOSFET.
Select the suitable relay type when connecting a
non-Icom linear amplifier.
• Lead : Use mechanical relay.
(16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default)
• MOS-FET : Use semiconductor type relay.
(250 V/200 mA max.)
External Meter Output
Auto
Selects the desired item for an external meter indi-
cation.
• Auto : Outputs the receiving signal strength level
during receive, and outputs the selected
level (selected with [METER]), during
transmit. (default)
• S : Outputs the receiving signal strength level
during receive.
• Po : Outputs the transmitting power level dur-
ing transmit.
• SWR : Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.
• ALC : Outputs the ALC level during transmit.
• COMP : Outputs the compression level during
transmit.
• Vd : Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the
final amplifier MOSFETs.
• Id : Outputs the drain current of the final
amplifier MOSFETs.
External Meter Level
50
%
Sets the output level for an external meter indication
with in 0% to 100% range in 1% steps.
• Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indi-
cation. (4.7 kø
impedance)
REF Adjust
50
% (Example)
Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency
within 0% to 100% range in 1% steps during fre-
quency calibration.
NOTE: Default setting is different for each trans-
ceiver.
125
10
SET MODE
■ Display set mode
Bright (LCD)
50
%
Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0% (dark) to
100% (bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%)
Backlight (Switches)
80
Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1
(dark) to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80)
Display Type A
Selects the desired display type from A (Black back)
and B (Blue back). (default: A)
See p. 146 for details.
Display Font Basic
Selects the desired font for frequency readout from
Basic, Italic and Round. (default: Basic)
See p. 146 for details.
Meter Response MID
Set meter needle response from SLOW, MID and
FAST. (default: MID)
This setting is effective for the standard and edge-
w
ise meter type selections only.
Meter Type (Normal Screen) Standard
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during normal
screen indication from Standard, Edgewise and Bar.
(default: Standard)
Meter Type (Wide Screen) Bar
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide
screen or mini scope indication from Edgewise and
Bar. (default: Bar)
Meter Peak Hold (Bar) ON
Turns the meter peak hold function ON and OFF.
(default: ON)
This function is used for the bar meter only.
Memory Name ON
Sets the memory name indication, during memory
mode operation, ON and OFF. (default: ON)
• OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-
ory name is programmed.
• ON : The programmed memory name is dis-
played above the frequency indication.
☞ Continues to the next page.
126
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Display set mode (Continued)
APF−Width Popup (APF OFF
➔
ON) ON
Selects the pop-up display for the APF filter width
from ON and OFF. (default: ON)
MN−Q Popup (MN OFF
➔
ON) ON
Enables the pop-up indication capability when the
notch filter width is changed from ON to OFF.
(default: ON)
Screen Saver Function 60min
Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60
minutes) and OFF. (default: 60 min.)
The screen saver will activate when no operation is
performed for the selected time period to protect the
LCD from the “burn-in” effect.
Screen Saver Type Bound
Selects the screen saver type from “Bound,”
“Rotation” and “Twist.” (default: Bound)
The screen saver indication can be displayed
for your reference while pushing and holding
[PREVIEW] (F-5).
Opening Message ON
Turns the opening message screen indication capa-
bility ON and OFF. (default: ON)
My Call
Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long,
displayed in the opening screen.
Usually, you set your call sign for the opening
screen.
Capital letters, numerals, some symbols (– / . @)
and spaces can be used.
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the call sign can also be
edited from the keyboard.
z
Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edit condi-
tion.
• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character.
• Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals
and symbols.
•
Push [Ω] (F-1)
or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement.
• Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
• Push [SPACE] (F-4)
to input a space.
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can
also enter numerals.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.
127
10
SET MODE
■ Others set mode
Calibration Marker OFF
This item is used for a simple frequency check of the
transceiver. (default: OFF)
See p. 147 for calibration procedure.
NOTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after
checking the frequency of the transceiver.
• OFF : Calibration marker OFF
• ON : Calibration marker ON
Beep (Confirmation) ON
A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con-
firm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent
operation. (default: ON)
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 123)
•
OFF : Confirmation beep OFF
• ON : Confirmation beep ON
Beep (Band Edge) ON (Default)
A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters
or exits an amateur band. This functions indepen-
dent of the confirmation beep setting (above).
The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. 123)
W
hen “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” is
selected, [BAND]
appears in the display above the
function switch (F-5), and up to 30 band edge fre-
quencies can be set in band edge screen.
• OFF : Band edge beep OFF
• ON (Default) : Band edge beep sounds when an
operating frequency enters or exits a
default amateur band. (default)
•
ON (User) : A beep sounds when an operating
frequency enters or exits an ama-
teur band that is set in band edge
screen. (p. 31)
• ON (User) & TX Limit
: A beep sounds when an operating
frequency enters or exits an amateur
band that is set in band edge screen
and TX is limited out of the band.
(p. 31)
Beep Sound 1000Hz
Sets the desired beep frequency within 500 to
2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz)
RF/SQL Control RF+SQL
The [RF/SQL] control can be set as the RF/squelch
control (default), the squelch control only (RF gain
is fixed at maximum) or ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in
SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM
and FM).
See pgs. 2, 33 for details.
• AUTO : [RF/SQL] control as RF gain control
in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch
control in AM and FM
• SQL : [RF/SQL] control as squelch control
• RF+SQL : [RF/SQL] control as RF/squelch control
(default)
Quick Dualwatch ON
When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding
[DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. sets the sub readout fre-
quency to the main readout frequency, and activates
dualwatch operation.
(default: ON)
• OFF : Quick dualwatch OFF
• ON : Quick dualwatch ON
☞ Continues to the next page.
128
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Others set mode (Continued)
Quick SPLIT ON
When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding
[SPLIT] for 1 sec. sets the unselected VFO’s readout
frequency and operating mode to the selected VFO’s
readout, and activates split operation. (default: ON)
See p. 89 for details.
• OFF : Quick split OFF
• ON : Quick split ON
FM SPLIT Offset (HF) –0.100MHz
Sets the offset (difference between transmit and
receive frequencies) for the quick split function. This
setting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is
used to input the repeater offset for an HF band.
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 to
+9.999
MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.100 MHz)
FM SPLIT Offset (50M) –0.500MHz
Sets the offset (difference between transmit and
receive frequencies) for the quick split function. This
setting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is
used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band.
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.500 MHz)
SPLIT LOCK OFF
When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to
adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC]
even while the lock function is activated.
(default: OFF)
See pgs. 88, 89 for split frequency operation details.
• OFF : Split lock OFF
• ON : Split lock ON
Tuner (Auto Start) OFF
The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start
capability which starts tuning if the SWR is high.
(default: OFF)
• OFF : The tuner remains OFF even when the
SWR is high.
• ON : Automatic tune starts even when the tuner
is turned OFF during HF bands operation.
Tuner (PTT Start) OFF
Tuning of the internal/external antenna tuner
can be started automatically at the moment the
[PTT] is pushed after the operating frequency is
changed (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency).
(default: OFF)
• OFF : Tuning starts only when [TUNER] is
pushed.
• ON : (Internal antenna tuner) Tuning starts
when [PTT] is pushed on a new frequency
(more than 1% from last-tuned frequency) if
the internal antenna tuner is ON.
(External antenna tuner) Tuning always
starts when [PTT] is pushed on a new
frequency (more than 1%) regardless of the
external antenna tuner ON/OFF.
129
10
SET MODE
Tuner Preset Memory Clear
The preset memory* of the selected antenna can be
cleared with pushing [CLR] (F-5).
* The variable capacitor settings are memorized as
a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz
steps) after the tuner matches an antenna.
• ANT1 Push [CLR] : The preset memory of the
antenna that is
connected to
[ANT 1] is cleared after push-
ing
[CLR] (F-5).
• ANT2 Push [CLR] : The preset memory of the
antenna that is
connected to
[ANT 2] is cleared after push-
ing
[CLR] (F-5).
[ANT] Switch Auto
You can set the antenna connector selection to
automatic, manual or non-selection (when using 1
antenna only). (default: Auto)
• OFF : Antenna switch is not activated and does
not function. The [ANT1] connector is
always selected.
• Manual : Antenna switch is activated and selects
an antenna manually.
•
Auto :
A
ntenna switch is activated and the
band memory memorizes the selected
antenna.
See p. 112 for details.
Transverter Function Auto
Selects the transverter operation condition from
Auto and ON. (default: Auto)
• Auto : The transceiver turns into transverter oper-
ation condition when 2 to 13.8 V DC is
applied to [ACC2] pin 6.
• ON : Turn the transverter operation ON.
Transverter Offset 16.000MHz (14.100.0
➔
30.100.0)
Sets the desired offset frequency for the trans-
verter operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz
steps. (default: 16.000 MHz)
RTTY Mark Frequency 2125
Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark
frequency is switched between 1275, 1615 and
2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz)
2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal
RTTY decoder is used.
RTTY Shift Width 170
Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable
values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz)
170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal
RTTY decoder is used.
☞ Continues to the next page.
130
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Others set mode (Continued)
RTTY Keying Polarity Normal
Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse
keying polarity can be selected. (default: Normal)
When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space
are reversed.
• Normal
: Key open/close = Mark/Space
• Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark
PSK Tone Frequency 1500
Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK
reception from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.
(default: 1500 Hz)
SPEECH Language English
Selects the speech language from English and
Japanese. (default: English)
SPEECH Speed HIGH
Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and
LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)
SPEECH S-Level ON
The IC-7600 speech processor can announce
frequency, mode and signal level. Signal level
announcement can be deactivated if desired.
(default: ON)
When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not
announced.
•
OFF : Signal level is not announced. (Operating
frequency and mode is announced.)
• ON : Signal level, operating frequency and mode
is announced.
SPEECH [MODE] Switch OFF
Selects the operating mode speech capability when
a mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF. (default: OFF)
• OFF : Operating mode speech capability OFF
• ON : Operating mode speech capability ON
The selected operating mode is announced
when a mode switch is pushed.
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch SPEECH/LOCK
Selects the [SPEECH/LOCK] switch action.
(default: SPEECH/LOCK)
• SPEECH/LOCK : (Push) The voice synthesizer
function is activated.
(Push and hold) The dial lock
function is turned ON or OFF.
• LOCK/SPEECH : (Push) The dial lock function is
turned ON or OFF.
(Push and hold) The voice syn-
thesizer function is activated.
131
10
SET MODE
Memopad Numbers 5
Sets the number of memo pad channels available.
5 or 10 memo pads can be selected. (default: 5)
MAIN DIAL Auto TS HIGH
Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial.
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step
automatically changes several times as selected.
There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH
(Fastest) and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)
•
HIGH : Approx. 5 times faster when the tun-
in
g step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps;
approx. 2 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps.
• LOW : Approx. 2 times faster
• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
MIC Up/Down Speed HIGH
Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned
when the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are
pushed and held. HIGH or LOW can be selected.
• LOW : Low speed (25 tuning steps/sec.)
• HIGH : High speed (default; 50 tuning steps/sec.)
Quick RIT/∂TX Clear OFF
Selects the RIT/∂TX frequency clearing instruction
with [CLEAR]. (default: OFF)
• OFF :
Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR]
is pushed and held for 1 sec.
• ON :
Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR]
is pushed momentarily.
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) Auto/Manual
Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation
from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
(default: Auto/Manual)
• Auto : Only the auto notch can be used.
• Manual : Only the manual notch can be used.
• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can
be used. (default)
[NOTCH] Switch (AM) Auto/Manual
Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from
Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
(default: Auto/Manual)
• Auto : Only the auto notch can be used.
• Manual : Only the manual notch can be used.
• Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can
be used.
SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning OFF
Selects the displayed frequency shift function from
ON and OFF. (default: OFF)
When this function is activated, the audio pitch or
tones of the received signal will remain the same
even when the operating mode is changed between
SSB and CW.
The amount of frequency shift may differ accord-
ing to the CW pitch setting.
• OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift.
• ON : The displayed frequency shifts when the
operating mode is changed between SSB
and CW.
☞ Continues to the next page.
132
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Others set mode (Continued)
CW Normal Side LSB
Selects the sideband used to receive CW in CW
normal mode from LSB and USB. (default: LSB)
APF Type SOFT
Select audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and
SHARP. (default: SOFT)
• SHARP : Sharp filter shape rejects interfering sig-
nals more aggressively.
• SOFT : Soft filter shape makes distinguishing
noise and signals easier. The audio filter
width is related to the CW pitch setting.
External Keypad (VOICE) OFF
Sets the external keypad for voice message trans-
mission capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF)
See page 18 for the equivalent circuit of an external
keypad and connection.
• OFF : External keypad does not function.
• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,
transmits the desired voice message con-
tents during a phone mode operation.
External Keypad (KEYER) OFF
Sets the external keypad for keyer memory trans-
mission capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF)
See page 18 for the equivalent circuit of an external
keypad and connection.
• OFF : External keypad does not function.
• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,
transmits the desired keyer memory con-
tents during CW mode operation.
External Keypad (RTTY) OFF
Sets the external keypad for RTTY TX memory
(RT1 to RT4) transmission capability ON and OFF.
(default: OFF)
See page 18 for the equivalent circuit of an external
keypad and connection.
• OFF : External keypad does not function.
• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,
transmits the desired RTTY TX memory
contents during RTTY mode operation.
External Keypad (PSK) OFF
Sets the external keypad for PSK TX memory
(PT1 to PT4) transmission capability ON and OFF.
(default: OFF)
See page 18 for the equivalent circuit of an external
keypad and connection.
• OFF : External keypad does not function.
• ON : Pushing one of external keypad switches,
transmits the desired PSK TX memory con-
tents during PSK mode operation.
133
10
SET MODE
Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (VOICE) OFF
Sets the voice message transmission capability ON
and OFF when one of [F1]−[F4] key of the keyboard
that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the
front panel is pushed. (default: OFF)
• OFF : [F1]−[F4] key of the connected keyboard
does not function.
• ON : Pushing one of [F1]−[F4] key of the con-
nected keyboard transmits the desired voice
message contents during a phone mode
operation.
Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (KEYER) OFF
Sets the keyer memory transmission capability ON
and OFF when one of [F1]−[F4] key of the keyboard
that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the
front panel is pushed. (default: OFF)
• OFF : [F1]−[F4] key of the connected keyboard
does not function.
• ON : Pushing one of [F1]−[F4] key of the con-
nected keyboard transmits the desired keyer
memory contents during CW mode opera-
tion.
CI–V Baud Rate Auto
Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800,
9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are available.
(default: Auto)
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automat-
ic
ally set according to the data rate of connected
controller.
CI–V Address 7Ah
To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has
its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code.
The IC-7600’s address is 7Ah.
When 2 or more IC-7600’s are connected to an
o
ptional CT-17 ci-v level converter, rotate the
main dial to select a different address for each IC-
7600; the range is 01h to 7Fh.
CI–V Transceive ON
Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7600
connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers.
(default: ON)
• OFF :
Transceive operation OFF
• ON :
Transceive operation ON
Changing the frequency, operating mode,
etc. on the IC-7600 automatically changes
those of connected transceivers (or receiv-
ers) and vice versa.
USB Serial Function CI-V
Select [USB] connector output data format from CI-V
and Decode.
(default: CI-V)
• CI-V : Outputs data in CI-V format.
• Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code
format.
☞ Continues to the next page.
134
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Others set mode (Continued)
Decode Baud Rate 9600
Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when
“Decode” is selected in “USB Serial Function”; set-
tings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
(default: 9600)
Keyboard Type English
Selects the connected keyboard type from English,
Japanese, United Kingdom, French, French
(Canadian), German, Portuguese, Portuguese
(Brazilian), Spanish, Spanish (Latin American) and
Italian. (default: English)
Keyboard Repeat Delay 250ms
Sets the time period for delay from 100 to
1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.)
When a key of the connected keyboard is pushed
and held for the set period, the character is input
continuously.
Keyboard Repeat Rate 10.9cps
Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard
within 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps)
*cps=character per second
When a key of the connected keyboard is pushed
and held, the character is repeatedly input with the
set speed.
• Ava
ilable repeating rate
2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6,
5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9,
12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0,
26.7, 30.0
135
10
SET MODE
■ USB-Memory set menu
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
• USB-Memory set menu
• Setting load screen (p. 137)
• Load option set mode (p. 138)
• Firmware update (p. 164)
• Format menu (p. 143)
• Setting save screen (p. 139)
• Save option set mode (p. 140)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
F-3
F-4
F-2
F-5 F-6
• Unmount USB-Memory (p. 142)
F-5
Push and hold for 1 sec.
Push and hold
for 1 sec.
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
136
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
137
10
SET MODE
■ File loading
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-5
F-4 F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
USB
LOAD/OPT
LOAD
OK
By loading the saved setting file from the USB-
Memory, you can easily set up another IC-7600 or
apply the several operators settings to one IC-7600.
q During set mode menu screen indication, push
[USB] (F-6) to select USB set menu screen.
w Push [LOAD] (F-1) to select setting load screen.
e Push and hold [LOAD/OPT] (F-4) for 1 sec. to
select load option set mode, then rotate the main
dial to set the desired loading conditions, if desired.
• See page 138 for details.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to set.
t Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired
setting file.
y Push [LOAD/OPT] (F-4).
• Confirmation screen appears.
u Push [OK] (F-5) to starts loading.
• After the loading is completed, the message dialog,
“Reboot the IC-7600,” appears.
i Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
D Load option set mode
LOAD Contents Select
Selects file load condition from All and Select.
(default: Select)
• All : Loads and sets the all following contents.
• Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only.
ANT Memory NO
Selects the antenna memory setting loading condi-
tion from YES and NO. (default: NO)
• YES : Loads and sets the antenna memory.
• NO : Use the original antenna memory setting.
REF Adjust NO
Selects the reference signal setting load condition
from YES and NO. (default: NO)
• YES :
Loads and sets the reference signal setting.
• NO : Use the original reference signal setting.
CI–V Address NO
Selects the CI-V address setting load condition from
YES and NO. (default: NO).
• YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address setting.
• NO : Use the original CI-V address setting.
Other Memory & Settings YES
This setting is fixed “YES.” • YES : Loads and sets memory channel contents
and other settings.
Voice TX Memory YES
Selects the voice TX message load condition from
YES and NO. (default: YES)
• YES : Loads and sets voice TX message.
• NO : Use the original voice TX message.
Voice RX Memory NO
Selects the voice RX message load condition from
YES and NO. (default: NO)
• YES : Loads and sets voice RX message.
• NO : Use the original voice RX message.
138
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ File saving
F-1 F-2 F-4F-3
DEL SPACE
F-1
F-2 F-4
F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
USB
SAVE EDIT
Symbol ABC
123
DIR/FILE
F-1 F-2
F-4
F-5
DEF SAVE/OPT
F-2 F-4F-3
REN DEL
MAKE
F-5
OK
Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc.
can be saved into the USB-Memory for backup.
q
During set mode menu screen indication, push
[USB] (F-6) to select USB-Memory set menu screen.
w Push [SAVE] (F-2) to select setting save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition.
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the
main dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^
– ( ) { } _
–
@ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈]
(F-2)
to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3)
to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
i
nsert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
• Save option
z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to
enter save option set mode.
x Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the item,
then rotate the main dial to select the desired
setting. (see p. 140 for details)
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous
indication.
• Saving location
z
Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-4) to select the upper directory.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3)
to select folder in the
same directory.
• Push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
folder
in the directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete
the folder.
• Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
in
g a new folder. (Edit the name with the same
manner as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file
name.
r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5).
• Confirmation screen appears.
t Push [OK] (F-5) to save.
• After saving is completed, return to USB-Memory set
menu automatically.
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connector
on the front panel, the file name can also be edited from
the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required.
139
10
SET MODE
140
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Save option set mode
SAVE Contents All
Selects file save condition from All and Select.
(default: All)
• All : Saves all the following contents.
• Select : Saves the selected contents only.
Memory & Settings YES
This setting is fixed “YES.” • YES : Saves memory channel contents and set-
tings of set modes.
Voice TX Memory YES
Selects the voice TX message save condition from
YES and NO. (default: YES)
• YES : Saves the voice TX message.
• NO : Does not save.
Voice RX Memory NO
Selects the voice RX message save condition from
YES and NO. (default: NO)
• YES : Saves the voice RX message.
• NO : Does not save.
■ Changing a file name
Keypad
F-1 F-2 F-3
EXIT/SET
Main dial
DIR/FILE
RENSymbol ABC
123
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the file name can also be
edited from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is
required.
The file name, saved in the USB-Memory, can be re-
named from the transceiver as desired.
q
During setting save screen indication, push
[DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired folder.
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-
able as the default.
•
After the folder is selected, push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to d
isplay content folder(s), if available.
w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select file list screen.
e
Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired
file.
r Push [REN] (MF5) momentarily to select the file
name edit condition.
t Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to
select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to
9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) { } _
–
@ can be selected.
•
Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈] (F-2)
to
move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3) to delete a
character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
insert a space.
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can
also enter numerals.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
141
10
SET MODE
■ Deleting a file
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-5
DIR/FILE
DEL
OK
■ Unmounting USB-Memory
F-5
OK
UNMOUNT
RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is
irreversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a
setting file!
q During setting save screen indication, push
[DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired folder.
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-
able as the default.
•
After the folder is selected, push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to d
isplay content folder(s), if available.
w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select file list screen.
e Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired
file to be deleted.
r Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec.
• Confirmation screen appears.
t Push [OK] (F-5) to delete.
• After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-
matically.
CAUTION: When removing the USB-Memory,
unmount operation is recommended. If you do not
unmount the memory in this case, data in the USB-
memory may be corrupted.
q
During USB-Memory set menu screen indication,
p
ush and hold [UNMOUNT] (F-5) for 1 sec.
• Confirmation screen appears.
w Push [OK] (F-5) to unmount the USB-Memory.
e After the indicator above [USB] (A) connector goes
off, remove the USB-Memory.
142
10
SET MODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Formatting the USB-Memory
F-6F-4
FORMAT FAT32
F-5
OKFAT
/
CANCEL
/
Saved data in the USB-Memory can be erased.
IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in
the USB-Memory. Making a backup file on your PC
is recommended.
q
During USB-Memory set menu screen indication,
p
ush and hold [FORMAT] (F-4) for 1 sec.
• Confirmation screen appears.
w Push [FAT] (F-5) or [FAT32] (F-6) to select the for-
mat type, FAT or FAT32, respectively.
• Confirmation screen appears.
e Push [OK] (F-5) to format.
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel.
r Returns to USB-Memory set menu indication auto-
matically.
NOTE: If no USB-Memory is inserted and
[FORMAT] (F-4) is selected as in step q, an error
message appears as below.
143
10
SET MODE
D Transceiver power
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Power does not come on
when the [POWER] switch is
pushed.
• Power cable is improperly connected.
• Fuse is blown.
• Re-connect the DC power cable correctly.
• Check for the cause, then replace the fuse
with the spare one.
( Fuses are installed in the DC power cable
and the internal PA unit.)
p. 20
p. 149
D Transmit and receive
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
No sounds from the speaker. • Volume level is too low.
• The squelch is closed.
• The transceiver is in transmit.
• Rotate the [AF] control clockwise to obtain a
suitable listening level.
• Rotate the [RF/SQL] control to 11 o’clock
position to open the squelch.
• Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the
SEND line of an external unit, if connected.
p. 34
p. 33
p. 36
Sensitivity is too low, and only
strong signals are audible.
• The antenna is not connected properly.
• The antenna for another band is selected.
• The antenna is not properly tuned.
• The attenuator is activated.
• Re-connect to the antenna connector.
• Select an antenna suitable for the operating
frequency.
•
Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually
tune the antenna.
• Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to select
“ATT OFF.”
—
p. 112
p. 113
p. 72
Received audio is unclear or
distorted.
• Wrong operating mode is selected.
• PBT function is activated.
• Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a
strong signal.
• Preamp is activated.
• The noise reduction is activated and the [NR]
control
is too far clockwise.
• Select a suitable operating mode.
• Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to reset
the function.
• Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF.
• Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twice to turn the
function OFF.
• Set the [NR] control for maximum readability.
p. 32
p. 75
p. 81
p. 72
p. 82
The [ANT] switch does not
function
• The antenna switch has not been activated. • Set the antenna switch in set mode to “Auto”
or “Manual.”
p. 130
Transm
itting is impossible. • The operating frequency is not inside a ham
band.
•
Set the frequency to be in a ham band. p. 28
Output power is too low. • The [RF POWER]
control is set too far coun-
terclockwise
• The drive gain level is set too high.
• The [MIC GAIN] control is set too far counter-
clockwise
• The antenna for another band is selected.
• The antenna is not properly tuned.
• Rotate the [RF POWER] control clockwise.
• Set the drive gain level to a suitable level.
• Set the [MIC GAIN] control to a suitable posi-
tion.
• Select an antenna suitable for the operating
frequency.
• Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually
tune the antenna.
p. 36
p. 37
p. 36
p. 112
p. 113
No contact can be made with
another station.
• RIT or ∂TX funct
ion is activated.
• Split frequency function and/or dualwatch are/
is activated.
• Push [RIT] or [∂TX] to turn the function OFF.
• Push [SPLIT] and/or [DUALWATCH] to turn
the function OFF.
pgs. 73,
87
pgs. 79,
88
Transmit signal is unclear or
distorted.
• The [MIC GAIN]
control is set too far clock-
wise.
• The speech compressor function is activated.
• Set the [MIC GAIN] control to a suitable posi-
tion.
• Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the function OFF.
p. 37
p. 86
Repeater cannot be accessed.
• Split frequency function is not activated.
• Programmed subaudible tone frequency is
wrong.
• Push [SPLIT] to to turn the function ON
• Reset the frequency using set mode.
p. 88
p. 28
■ Troubleshooting
The following chart is designed to help you correct
problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem
or
solve it through the use of this chart, contact your
nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center.
11
144
MAINTENANCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
145
11
MAINTENANCE
■ Main dial brake adjustment
The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit
your preference.
The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of
the front panel. See the figure at right.
Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension
level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in
one direction.
Main dial
Brake
adjustment
Light
Heavy
D Scanning
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Programmed scan does not
stop.
• Squelch is open. • Set the [RF/SQL] control to the threshold
point.
p. 33
Programmed scan does not
start.
•
The same frequencies have been programmed
in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2.
• Program different frequencies in scan edge
memory channel P1 and P2.
p. 101
Memory scan does not start. •
2 or more memory channels have not been
programmed.
• Program more than 2 memory channels. p. 101
Select memory scan does not
start.
•
2 or more memory channels have not been
designated as select channels.
• Designate more than 2 memory channels as
select channels for the scan.
p. 110
D Display
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
The displayed frequency does
not change properly.
• The dial lock function is activated.
• A set mode screen is selected.
• The internal CPU has malfunctioned.
•
Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to
turn the function OFF.
• Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set
mode screen.
• Reset the CPU.
p. 82
p. 118
p. 149
The display indicates the IC-
7600 screen with “bound,”
“rotat
ion” or “twist” condition.
• The screen saver function is activated. • Operate the transceiver.
• Set the screen saver function in set mode to
“OFF.”
—
p. 127
D Format USB-Memory
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Format error appears when
formatting in FAT32
• The inserted USB-Memory capacity is smaller
than 64 MB.
•
Insert a
USB-Memory
larger than 64 MB or
select the FAT format.
p. 143
Format error appears when
formatt
ing in FAT
• The inserted USB-Memory capacity is larger
than 2 GB.
•
Insert a
USB-Memory
smaller than 2 GB or
select the FAT32 format.
p. 143
■ SWR reading
The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the trans-
mission line in all modes.
q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner OFF.
w Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to display
multi-function meter.
e Push [RTTY/PSK] once or twice to select RTTY
mode.
r Push [TRANSMIT].
t Rotate [RF POWER] clockwise past the 12 o’clock
position for more than 30 W output power.
y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to close multi-function meter.
The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter to
the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1.
[RF POWER]
METER
TRANSMIT
TUNER
RTTY/PSK
EXIT/SET
■ Screen type and font selections
2 types of screen images and 3 types of frequency
readout indication fonts are available in the IC-7600.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [DISP] (F-3) to enter display set mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Display
Type” item when selecting the screen image, select
“Display Font” when selecting the frequency read-
out indication font.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen
image or font.
• Screen image is selectable from A (Black back) and B
(Blue back).
•
Basic, Italic and Round are available for the frequency
readout font.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit from display set
mode.
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
F-6
DISP
EXIT/SET
Main dial
SET
DEF
• Screen image example—
Display Type: B, Display Font: Italic
Better than 1.5:1
146
11
MAINTENANCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Frequency calibration (approximate)
A very accurate frequency counter is required to cal-
ibrate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a
rough check may be performed by receiving radio
station WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency
signals.
CAUTION: The IC-7600 has been thoroughly
adjusted and tested at the factory before being
shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.
q Push [SSB] to select USB mode.
w Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the
PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/∂TX func-
tion is not activated.
e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station
minus 1 kHz.
• When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as
a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for
14.99900 MHz.
• Other standard frequencies can be used.
r Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
t Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
y Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode.
u Push [Y] (F-1) several times to select the
“Calibration Marker” item.
i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-
tion marker ON.
o Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to set mode menu
screen.
!0 Push [ACC] (F-2) to enter accessory set mode.
!1 Push [Z] (F-2) several times to select the “REF
Adjust” item.
!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with
the received standard signal as shown at right.
• Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same
frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.
!3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in others set
mode.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.
F-1 F-2
F-6
EXIT/SET
Main dial
SET
F-5
OTHERS
ACC
SSB
PBT-CLR
/
• Calibration marker item
• REF Adjust item
147
11
MAINTENANCE
■ Opening the transceiver’s case
Follow the case opening procedures shown here
when you want to replace the clock backup battery or
internal fuse.
CAUTION: Turn the power OFF and disconnect
the DC power cable from the transceiver before
performing any work on the transceiver. Otherwise,
there is danger of electric shock and/or equipment
damage.
q Remove the two screws from the carrying handle-
and remove the handle from the transceiver.
w Remove the 6 screws from the top of the trans-
ceiver and the 4 screws from the sides, then lift up
the top cover.
e Turn the transceiver upside-down.
CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR
ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is
being turned upside down. This may damage
the transceiver.
r
Remove 6 screws from the bottom, then lift up the
bottom cover.
✔ About the leg pads
To detach the leg pads from the right side panel of
the top/bottom cover, push them from the inner side
of each cover after steps q to r as above.
Carrying handle
Top cover
Bottom cover
PA shielding
plate
■ Clock backup battery replacement
The IC-7600 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032)
inside for clock and timer functions. The usual life of
the backup battery is approximately 2 years.
When the backup battery is discharged, the trans-
ceiver transmits and receives normally but cannot
retain the current time.
CAUTION:
Turn the power OFF and disconnect
the DC power cable from the transceiver
before
removing the transceiver’s
cover.
q Remove the bottom cover as shown above.
w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the
front panel as illustrated at right.
• Make sure the battery polarity is correct.
e Return the bottom cover to the original position.
r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. 116)
148
11
MAINTENANCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Fuse replacement
If a fuse blows or the transceiver stops functioning,
try to find the source of the problem, and replace the
damaged fuse with a new, adequately rated fuse.
CAUTION:
Turn the power OFF and disconnect
the DC power cable from the transceiver
before
removing the transceiver’s
cover.
D DC power cable fuse replacement
Refer the figure illustrated at right for the DC power
cable fuse replacement.
D Circuitry fuse replacement
The 13.8 V DC from the DC power cable is applied to
all units in the IC-7600, except for the power ampli-
fier, through the circuitry fuse. This fuse is installed in
the PA unit.
q Remove the top cover. (p. 148)
w Remove the 11 screws, then remove the bottom
cover and the PA shielding plate as shown at right.
e Replace the circuitry fuse as shown in the diagram
as at right.
r Replace the PA shielding plate, top cover and
screws to their original position.
R WARNING:
DO NOT pull the speaker cable
when removing or replacing the PA shielding plate.
Otherwise, a fire, injury or damage the transceiver
may occur.
■ Resetting the CPU
q Turn the transceiver power OFF in advance.
w While pushing and holding [F-INP ENT] and [MW],
push [POWER] to turn power ON.
• The internal CPU is reset.
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.
• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies
when resetting is complete.
e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if
desired.
NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-
tents in memory channels and returns programmed
values in set mode to default values.
The IC-7600 has two fuse types as below installed for
transceiver protection.
• DC power cable fuses .............................. ATC 30 A
• C
ircuitry fuse .............................................. ATC 5 A
ATC 30 A fuse
PA shielding plate
ATC 5 A fuse
Speaker cable
POWER
F-INP
ENT
MW
149
11
MAINTENANCE
■ About protection indications
The IC-7600 has a 2-step protection function to pro-
tect the final power amplifiers.
The protector monitors the power amplifier temper-
ature and activates when the temperature becomes
extremely high.
• Power down transmission
Reduces the transmit output power to 50 W.
“LMT” appears beside the TX indicator (p. 14) dur-
ing transmit.
• Transmission inhibit
Deactivates the transmitter.
The TX indicator (p. 14) is displayed in gray during
transmit.
When the protector is activated, wait until the
power amplifier cools down using the transceiver in
stand-by or receive condition.
NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF
when the protector is ON. If you do, the cooling fan
will not function and it will take longer to cool the
transceiver.
The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in
the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.
■ Screen saver function
The IC-7600 has a screen saver function to protect
the LCD from the “burn-in” effect.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [DISP] (F-3) to enter display set mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) several times to select
the “Screen Saver Function” item.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired time
period for the screen saver activation from 15, 30,
60 min. and OFF.
• Deactivate the screen saver with “OFF” selection.
y Push [Z] (F-2) to select the “Screen Saver Type”
item.
u Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver type
from “Bound,” “Rotation” and “Twist.”
• Push and hold [PREVIEW] (F-5) to display the indica-
tion for your reference.
i Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.
Check the temperature
F-1 F-2 F-3
F-6
DISP
EXIT/SET
Main dial
SET
F-5
PREVIEW
When “Twist” is selected
150
11
MAINTENANCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Remote jack (CI-V) information
Controller to IC-7600
FE FE 7A E0 Cn Sc Data area FD
Preamble
code (fixed)
Transceiver’s
default address
Controller’s
default address
Command number
(see the command table)
Sub command number
(see command table)
BCD code data such as
for frequency, memory
number entry
(see data content description)
End of message
code (fixed)
OK message to controller
FE FE E0 7A FB FD
FE FE E0 7A FA FD
Preamble
code
(fixed)
Controller’s
default address
Transceiver’s
default address
OK code
(fixed)
End of message
code (fixed)
NG message to controller
NG code
(fixed)
IC-7600 to controller
q w e r t y u
FE FE E0 7A Cn Sc Data area FD
q w e r t y u
12
151
CONTROL COMMAND
D CI-V connection example
The transceiver can be connected an optional CT-
17 ci-v level converter to a PC equipped with an
RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V
(CI-V) controls the transceiver.
Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be
connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port.
See p. 134 for setting the CI-V condition using set
mode.
D Data format
The CI-V system can be operated using the follow-
ing data formats. Data formats differ according to
command numbers. A data area or sub command is
added for some commands.
9−15V DC
PC
ct-17
mini-plug cable
IC-7600
RS-232C
cable
When the transceiver is connected to a PC with the
USB cable (third party), the optional CT-17 is not
required.
D Command table
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
00 see p. 157 Send frequency data (tr
ansceive)
01 see p. 157 Oper
ating mode selection for transceive
02 see p. 159 Read band edge frequenc
ies
03 see p. 157 Read oper
ating frequency
04 see p. 157 Read oper
ating mode
05 see p. 157 Set oper
ating frequency
06 see p. 157 Oper
ating mode selection for transceive
07 Select VFO mode
B0 Exchange ma
in and sub bands
B1 Equal
ize main and sub bands
C0 Turn the dualwatch OFF
C1 Turn the dualwatch ON
D0 Select ma
in band
D1 Select sub band
08 Select memory mode
0001 to
0099
Select memory channel
(0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99)
0100 Select program scan edge channel P1
0101 Select program scan edge channel P2
09 Memor
y write
0A Memory to VFO
0B Memory clear
0E 00 Scan stop
01 Programmed/memory scan start
02 Programmed scan start
03
:F scan start
12 F
ine programmed scan start
13 F
ine :F scan start
22 Memory scan start
23 Select memory scan start
A1 Select
:F scan span ±5 kHz
A2 Select
:F scan span ±10 kHz
A3 Select
:F scan span ±20 kHz
A4 Select
:F scan span ±50 kHz
A5 Select
:F scan span ±100 kHz
A6 Select
:F scan span ±500 kHz
A7 Select
:F scan span ±1 MHz
B0 Set as non-select channel
B1 Set as select channel
( The previously set number by CI-V is set after
turning power ON, or “1” is selected if no selec-
t
ion is performed.)
01 Set as select channel “★1”
02 Set as select channel “★2”
03 Set as select channel “★3”
B2 00 Set “ALL” for select memory scan
01 Set “★1” for select memory scan
02 Set “★2” for select memory scan
03 Set “★3” for select memory scan
D0 Set scan resume OFF
D3 Set scan resume ON
0F 00 T
urn the split function OFF
01 T
urn the split function ON
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
10 00 Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tun
ing step
01 Select 100 Hz tun
ing step
02 Select 1 kHz tun
ing step
03 Select 5 kHz tun
ing step
04 Select 9 kHz tun
ing step
05 Select 10 kHz tun
ing step
06 Select 12.5 kHz tun
ing step
07 Select 20 kHz tun
ing step
08 Select 25 kHz tun
ing step
11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF
06 Send/read 6 dB attenuator
12 Send/read 12 dB attenuator
18 Send/read 18 dB attenuator
12 0000 Send/read ANT1 select
ion (RX ANT OFF)
0001 Send/read ANT1 select
ion (RX ANT ON)
0100 Send/read ANT2 select
ion (RX ANT OFF)
0101 Send/read ANT2 select
ion (RX ANT ON)
13 00 Announce all data w
ith voice synthesizer
01 Announce frequency and S-meter le
vel with
voice synthesizer
02
Announce receive mode with voice synthesizer
14 01 0000 to
0255
Send/read [AF] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
02 0000 to
0255
Send/read [RF] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=11 o'clock)
03 0000 to
0255
Send/read [SQL] level
(0000=11 o'clock, 0255=max. CW)
06 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NR] level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
07 0000 to
0255
Send/read
inner [TWIN PBT] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)
08 0000 to
0255
Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] pos
ition
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)
09 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW p
itch
(
0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz, 0255=900 Hz;
5 Hz steps)
0A 0000 to
0255
Send/read [RF POWER] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
0B 0000 to
0255
Send/read [MIC GAIN] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
0C 0000 to
0255
Send/read [KEY SPEED] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
0D 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NO
TCH] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)
0E 0000 to
0255
Send/read COMP level
(0000=0, 0255=10)
0F 0000 to
0255
Send/read [BK-IN DELA
Y] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
10 0000 to
0255
Send/read [BAL] pos
ition
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)
12 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
14 0000 to
0255
Send/read DRIVE ga
in
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
15 0000 to
0255
Send/read Mon
itor gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
16 0000 to
0255
Send/read
VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
17 0000 to
0255
Send/read Ant
i VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
19 0000 to
0255
Send/read BRIGHT level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
15 01 00 Read squelch cond
ition (squelch close)
01 Read squelch cond
ition (squelch open)
02 0000 to
0255
Read S-meter level
(0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60 dB)
11 0000 to
0255
Read RF power meter
(0000=0%, 0143=50%, 0213=100%)
12 0000 to
0255
Read SWR meter
( 0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5, 0080=SWR2.0)
13 0000 to
0255
Read ALC meter
(0000=0, 0120=Max.)
14 0000 to
0255
Read COMP meter
(0000=0 dB, 0130=15 dB, 0241=30 dB)
152
12
CONTROL COMMAND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
15 15 0000 to
0255
Read VD meter
(0152=10 V, 0181=13 V, 0212=16 V)
16 0000 to
0255
Read ID meter
(0000=0 A, 0097=10 A, 0241=25 A)
16 02 00 Preamp OFF
01 Preamp 1 ON
02 Preamp 2 ON
12 00 A
GC FAST selection
01 A
GC MID selection
02 A
GC SLOW selection
22 00 No
ise blanker OFF
01 No
ise blanker ON
32 00 A
udio peak filter OFF
01 A
udio peak filter WIDE ON
(320 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set)
02 A
udio peak filter MID ON
(160 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set)
03 A
udio peak filter NAR ON
(80 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set)
40 00 No
ise reduction OFF
01 No
ise reduction ON
41 00 A
uto notch function OFF
01 A
uto notch function ON
42 00 Repeater tone OFF
01 Repeater tone ON
43 00 Tone squelch OFF
01 Tone squelch ON
44 00 Speech compressor OFF
01 Speech compressor ON
45 00 Mon
itor function OFF
01 Mon
itor function ON
46 00 V
OX function OFF
01 V
OX function ON
47 00 BK-IN funct
ion OFF
01 Sem
i BK-IN function ON
02 Full BK-IN funct
ion ON
48 00 Man
ual notch function OFF
01 Man
ual notch function ON
4F 00 T
win peak filter OFF
01 T
win peak filter ON
50 00 D
ial lock function OFF
01 D
ial lock function ON
19 00 Read the tr
ansceiver ID
1A 00 see p. 159 Send/read memory contents
01 see p. 157 Send/read band stac
king register contents
02 see p. 157 Send/read memory keyer contents
03 00 to 49 Send/read the selected filter w
idth
( SSB, CW, PSK: 00=50 Hz, 40=3600 Hz;
RTTY: 00=50 Hz, 31=2700 Hz;
AM:
00=200 Hz, 49=10 kHz)
04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected A
GC time constant
(00=OFF, 01=0.1/0.3 sec., 13=6.0/8.0 sec.)
05 0001 see p. 120
Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF
0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0004 see p. 120 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF
0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX tone (Bass) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0007 see p. 120 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF
0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX tone (Bass) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0010 see p. 121 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF
0011 see p. 121
Send/read RTTY RX
HPF/LPF
0012 see p. 121
Send/read PSK RX
HPF/LPF
0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0014 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0015 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0016 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0017 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0018 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=–5, 10=+5)
0019 see p. 122 Send/read SSB
TX bandwidth for WIDE
0020 see p. 122 Send/read SSB
TX bandwidth for MID.
0021 see p. 122 Send/read SSB
TX bandwidth for NARROW
0022 0000 to
0255
Send/read DRIVE ga
in
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0023 0000 to
0255
Send/read speech level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0024 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW s
idetone level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0025 00 CW s
idetone level limit OFF
01 CW s
idetone level limit ON
0026 0000 to
0255
Send/read beep level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0027 00 Beep le
vel limit OFF
01 Beep le
vel limit ON
0028 00 Squelch m
ute effect OFF (squelch is fixed
open) for audio output from USB-B connector
01 Squelch m
ute effect ON for audio output from
USB-B connector
0029 0000 to
0255
Send/read modulat
ion level for audio input to
USB-B connector (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0030 00 [MIC] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA OFF
01 [A
CC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA OFF
02 Both [MIC] and [A
CC] selection for MOD
input connector during DATA OFF
03 [USB] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA OFF
0031 00 [MIC] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA1
01 [A
CC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA1
02 Both [MIC] and [A
CC] selection for MOD
input connector during DATA1
03 [USB] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA1
0032 00 [MIC] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA2
01 [A
CC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA2
02 Both [MIC] and [A
CC] selection for MOD
input connector during DATA2
03 [USB] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA2
0033 00 [MIC] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA3
01 [A
CC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA3
02 Both [MIC] and [A
CC] selection for MOD
input connector during DATA3
03 [USB] select
ion for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA3
0034 00 Lead select
ion for SEND relay type
01 MOS-FET select
ion for SEND relay type
0035 00 A
uto selection for external meter output
01 S (rece
iving signal strength) selection for ex-
ternal meter output
02 P
o (RF power) selection for external meter
selection
03 SWR select
ion for external meter output
04 ALC select
ion for external meter output
05 COMP select
ion for external meter output
06 Vd select
ion for external meter output
07 Id select
ion for external meter output
0036 0000 to
0255
Send/read external meter output level
(see p. 125)
D Command table (continued)
153
12
CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0037 0000 to
0255
Send/read reference frequency
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0038 0000 to
0255
Send/read LCD bac
klight brightness level
(0000=0% (dark), 0255=100% (bright))
0039 0000 to
0255
Send/read k
ey backlight brightness level
(0000=0% (dark), 0255=100% (bright))
0040 00 D
isplay type A selection
01 D
isplay type B selection
0041 00 Bas
ic font selection
01 Ital
ic font selection
02 Round f
ont selection
0042 00 SLO
W selection for meter response
01 MID select
ion for meter response
02 F
AST selection for meter response
0043 00 Standard meter select
ion for normal screen
indication
01 Edge
wise meter selection for normal screen
indication
02 Bar meter select
ion for normal screen indica-
tion
0044 00 Edge
wise meter selection for wide screen
indication
01
Bar meter selection for wide screen indication
0045 00 Meter peak hold function for Bar meter OFF
01 Meter peak hold funct
ion for Bar meter ON
0046 00 Memor
y name indication OFF
01 Memor
y name indication ON
0047 00 A
udio peak filter width pop-up indication OFF
01 A
udio peak filter width pop-up indication ON
0048 00
Manual notch filter width pop-up indication OFF
01
Manual notch filter width pop-up indication ON
0049 00 Screen saver OFF
01 15 m
in. selection for screen saver
02 30 m
in. selection for screen saver
03 60 m
in. selection for screen saver
0050 00 Bound select
ion for screen saver type
01 Round select
ion for screen saver type
02 T
wist selection for screen saver type
0051 00 Open
ing screen indication OFF
01 Open
ing screen indication ON
0052 see p. 158 Send/read open
ing screen contents.
0053 20000101
to
20991231
Send/read date
(
20000101=1st Jan. 2000,
20991231=31st Dec. 2099)
0054 0000 to
2359
Send/read t
ime
(0000=00:00, 2359=23:59)
0055 00 Clock 2 OFF
01 Clock 2 ON
0056 see p. 157 Send/read offset t
ime for clock 2
0057 see p. 158 Send/read clock 2 name *Up to 3 characters
0058 00 Cal
ibration marker OFF
01 Cal
ibration marker ON
0059 00 Confir
mation beep OFF
01 Confir
mation beep ON
0060 00 Band edge beep OFF
01 Band edge beep ON (Beep sounds w
ith a
default amateur band)
02 Band edge beep w
ith user setting ON
03
Band edge beep with user setting/TX limit ON
0061 0050 to
0200
Send/read beep aud
io frequency
(0050=500 Hz, 0200=2000 Hz)
0062 00 A
uto selection for [RF/SQL]
01 SQL select
ion for [RF/SQL]
02 RF+SQL select
ion for [RF/SQL]
0063 00 Qu
ick dualwatch OFF
01 Qu
ick dualwatch ON
0064 00 Qu
ick split function OFF
01 Qu
ick split function ON
0065 see p. 158 FM spl
it offset frequency setting for HF
0066 see p. 158 FM spl
it offset frequency setting for 50 MHz
0067 00 Spl
it lock function OFF
01 Spl
it lock function ON
0068 00 Tuner auto start OFF
01 Tuner auto start ON
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0069 00 PTT tune OFF
01 PTT tune ON
0070 00 Antenna select
ion OFF
01 Man
ual antenna selection
02 A
uto antenna selection
0071 00 T
ransverter functions automatically
01 T
ransverter function ON
0072 see p. 158 Transverter offset frequency
0073 00 1275 Hz select
ion for RTTY mark frequency
01 1615 Hz select
ion for RTTY mark frequency
02 2125 Hz select
ion for RTTY mark frequency
0074 00 170 Hz select
ion for RTTY shift width
01 200 Hz select
ion for RTTY shift width
02 425 Hz select
ion for RTTY shift width
0075 00 R
TTY keying with normal polarity
01 R
TTY keying with reverse polarity
0076 00 1000 Hz select
ion for PSK tone frequency
01 1500 Hz select
ion for PSK tone frequency
02 2000 Hz select
ion for PSK tone frequency
0077 00 Engl
ish selection for voice synthesizer
speech language
01 J
apanese selection for voice synthesizer
speech language
0078 00 Speech speed slow
01 Speech speed fast
0079 00 S-meter level announcement OFF
01 S-meter announcement ON
0080 00 Oper
ating mode announcement (after push-
ing mode switch) OFF
01 Oper
ating mode announcement (after push-
ing mode switch) ON
0081 00 [SPEECH/LOCK] k
ey function setting
( Push momentariliy=SPEECH,
Push and hold=LOCK)
01 [SPEECH/LOCK] k
ey function setting
( Push momentariliy=LOCK,
Push and hold=SPEECH)
0082 00 Number of memo pad channels 5
01 Number of memo pad channels 10
0083 00 A
uto TS for main dial OFF
01 A
uto TS for main dial ON with LOW
02 A
uto TS for main dial ON with HIGH
0084 00
LOW selection for microphone Up/Down speed
01
HIGH selection for microphone Up/Down speed
0085 00 Quick RIT/:TX clear OFF
01 Qu
ick RIT/:TX clear ON
0086 00 A
uto notch selection for SSB operation
01 Man
ual notch selection for SSB operation
02
Auto/Manual notch
selection
for SSB operation
0087 00 Auto notch selection for AM operation
01 Man
ual notch selection for AM operation
02
Auto/Manual notch selection for AM operation
0088 00 SSB/CW synchronous tuning function OFF
01 SSB/CW synchronous tun
ing function ON
0089 00 LSB select
ion for CW normal side set
01 USB select
ion for CW normal side set
0090 00 SHARP select
ion for APF type
01 SOFT select
ion for APF type
0091 00 V
oice memory transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad
01 V
oice memory transmission ON with external
keypad
0092 00 Memor
y keyer transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad
01 Memor
y keyer transmission ON with external
keypad
0093 00 R
TTY memory transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad
01 R
TTY memory transmission ON with external
keypad
0094 00 PSK memor
y transmission OFF with external
keypad
01 PSK memor
y transmission ON with external
keypad
154
12
CONTROL COMMAND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Command table (continued)
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0095 00 V
oice memory transmission OFF with [F1]–
[F4] on the keyboard
01 V
oice memory transmission ON with [F1]–
[F4] on the keyboard
0096 00 Memor
y keyer transmission OFF with [F1]–
[F4] on the keyboard
01 Memor
y keyer transmission ON with [F1]–
[F4] on the keyboard
0097 00 CI-V tr
ansceive OFF
01 CI-V tr
ansceive ON
0098 00 CI-V select
ion for [USB-B] usage
01 Decode select
ion for [USB-B] usage
0099 00 300 bps select
ion for decode speed
01 1200 bps select
ion for decode speed
02 4800 bps select
ion for decode speed
03 9600 bps select
ion for decode speed
04 19200 bps select
ion for decode speed
0100 00 Engl
ish keyboard selection
01 J
apanese keyboard selection
02 Un
ited Kingdom keyboard selection
03 F
rench keyboard selection
04 F
rench (Canadian) keyboard selection
05 Ger
man keyboard selection
06 P
ortuguese keyboard selection
07 P
ortuguese (Brazilian) keyboard selection
08 Span
ish keyboard selection
09 Span
ish (Latin American) keyboard selection
10 Ital
ian keyboard selection
0101 0010 to
0100
Send/read keyboard repeat delay
(
0010=100 msec., 0100=1000 msec.;
50 msec. steps)
0102 00 to 31 Send/read keyboard repeat speed
(00=2.0 cps, 31=30.0 cps)
0103 00 Scope
indication during TX OFF
01 Scope
indication during TX ON
0104 00 Scope max.
hold function OFF
01 Scope max.
hold function ON
0105 00 F
ilter center selection for scope center fre-
quency (center mode only)
01 Carri
er point center selection for scope cen-
ter frequency (center mode only)
02 Carri
er point center (Abs. Freq.) selection for
scope center frequency (center mode only)
0106 see p. 158
Send/read waveform color for receiving signal
0107 see p. 158 Send/read waveform color for max. hold
0108 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±2.5 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±2.5 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±2.5 kHz span
0109 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±5 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±5 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±5 kHz span
0110 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±10 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±10 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±10 kHz span
0111 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±25 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±25 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±25 kHz span
0112 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±50 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±50 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±50 kHz span
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0113 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±100 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±100 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±100 kHz span
0114 00 SLO
W selection for scope sweep speed in
±250 kHz span
01 MID select
ion for scope sweep speed in
±250 kHz span
02 F
AST selection for scope sweep speed in
±250 kHz span
0115 see p. 158 S
cope edge frequencies for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz
band
0116 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 1.60 MHz to
2.00 MHz band
0117 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 2.00 MHz to
6.00 MHz band
0118 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 6.00 MHz to
8.00 MHz band
0119 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 8.00 MHz to
11.00 MHz band
0120 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 11.00 MHz to
15.00 MHz band
0121 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 15.00 MHz to
20.00 MHz band
0122 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 20.00 MHz to
22.00 MHz band
0123 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 22.00 MHz to
26.00 MHz band
0124 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 26.00 MHz to
30.00 MHz band
0125 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 30.00 MHz to
45.00 MHz band
0126 see p. 158 Scope edge frequenc
ies for 45.00 MHz to
60.00 MHz band
0127 00 A
uto monitor function OFF during voice
memory transmission
01 A
uto monitor function ON during voice mem-
ory transmission
0128 03 to 10 Send/read v
oice memory short play time
(03=3 sec., 10=10 sec.)
0129 05 to 15 Send/read v
oice memory normal record time
(05=5 sec., 15=15 sec.)
0130 00 Nor
mal selection for contest number style
01
“190→ANO” selection for contest number style
02
“190→ANT” selection for contest number style
03 “90→NO” selection for contest number style
04 “90→NT”
selection for contest number style
0131 01 M1 select
ion for count up trigger channel
02 M2 select
ion for count up trigger channel
03 M3 select
ion for count up trigger channel
04 M4 select
ion for count up trigger channel
0132 0001 to
9999
Send/read present number
(0001=1, 9999=9999)
0133 01 to 60 Send/read CW k
eyer repeat time
(01=1 sec., 60=60 sec.)
0134 28 to 45 Send/read CW k
eyer dot/dash ratio
(28=1:1:2.8, 45=1:1:4.5)
0135 00 2
msec. selection for rise time of the transmit-
ted CW envelope
01 4
msec. selection for rise time of the transmit-
ted CW envelope
02 6
msec. selection for rise time of the transmit-
ted CW envelope
03 8
msec. selection for rise time of the transmit-
ted CW envelope
04 10 msec.
selection for rise time of the trans-
mitted CW envelope
0136 00 Nor
mal selection for paddle polarity
01 Re
verse selection for paddle polarity
0137 00 Str
aight selection for keyer type
01 B
UG-KEY selection for keyer type
02 ELEC-KEY select
ion for keyer type
0138 00 M
ic. up/down keyer function OFF
01 M
ic. up/down keyer function ON
155
12
CONTROL COMMAND
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0139 00 R
TTY decoder FFT scope averaging function
OFF
01 Number 2 select
ion for RTTY decoder FFT
scope averaging function
02 Number 3 select
ion for RTTY decoder FFT
scope averaging function
03 Number 4 select
ion for RTTY decoder FFT
scope averaging function
0140 see p. 158 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for
RTTY decoder
0141 00 R
TTY decode USOS function OFF
01 R
TTY decode USOS function ON
0142 00 “CR,LF
,CR+LF” selection for RTTY decode
new line code
01 “CR+LF”
selection for RTTY decode new line
code
0143 00 OFF select
ion for RTTY diddle
01 BLANK select
ion for RTTY diddle
02 L
TRS selection for RTTY diddle
0144 00 R
TTY encode USOS function OFF
01 R
TTY encode USOS function ON
0145 00 RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboard’s [F12] OFF
01 RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboard’s [F12] ON
0146 00 R
TTY time stamp OFF
01 R
TTY time stamp ON
0147 00 Local t
ime selection for RTTY time stamp
01 Cloc
k2 selection for RTTY time stamp
0148 00 F
requency stamp for RTTY time stamp OFF
01 F
requency stamp for RTTY time stamp ON
0149 see p. 158 Send/read rece
ived text font color for RTTY
decoder
0150 see p. 158 Send/read tr
ansmitted text font color (RTTY)
0151 see p. 158 Send/read t
ime stamp text font color (RTTY)
0152 see p. 158 Send/read te
xt font color in TX buffer (RTTY)
0153 00 PSK decoder FFT scope a
veraging function
OFF
01 Number 2 select
ion for PSK decoder FFT
scope averaging function
02 Number 3 select
ion for PSK decoder FFT
scope averaging function
03 Number 4 select
ion for PSK decoder FFT
scope averaging function
0154 see p. 158 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for
PSK decoder
0155 00 ±8 Hz select
ion for PSK AFC function tuning
range
01 ±15 Hz select
ion for PSK AFC function tun-
ing range
0156 00 PSK t
ime stamp OFF
01 PSK t
ime stamp ON
0157 00 Local t
ime selection for PSK time stamp
01 Cloc
k2 selection for PSK time stamp
0158 00 F
requency stamp for PSK time stamp OFF
01 F
requency stamp for PSK time stamp ON
0159 see p. 158 Send/read rece
ived text font color for PSK
decoder
0160 see p. 158 Send/read tr
ansmitted text font color (PSK)
0161 see p. 158 Send/read t
ime stamp text font color (PSK)
0162 see p. 158 Send/read te
xt font color in TX buffer (PSK)
0163 00 LO
W scan speed selection
01 HIGH scan speed select
ion
0164 00 Scan resume OFF
01 Scan resume ON
0165 0000 to
0255
Send/read
VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0166 0000 to
0255
Send/read ANTI-V
OX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0167 00 to 20 Send/read
VOX delay time
(00=0.0 sec., 20=2.0 sec.)
0168 00 V
OX voice delay function OFF
01 Shor
t selection for VOX voice delay
02 M
id selection for VOX voice delay
03 Long select
ion for VOX voice delay
Cmd.
Sub cmd.
Data Description
1A 05 0169 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0170 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth
(00=1, 09=10)
0171 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB w
idth
(0000=1, 0255=100)
0172 0000 to
0255
Send/read MONIT
OR gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
06 see p. 158 Send/read D
ATA mode with filter set
07 00 WIDE select
ion for SSB transmit bandwidth
01 MID select
ion for SSB transmit bandwidth
02 NAR select
ion for SSB transmit bandwidth
08 00 SHARP select
ion for DSP filter type
01 SOFT select
ion for DSP filter type
09 00 3 kHz roofing filter select
ion
01 6 kHz roofing filter select
ion
02 15 kHz roofing filter select
ion
0A 00 WIDE select
ion for manual notch width
01 MID select
ion for manual notch width
02 NAR select
ion for manual notch width
1B 00 see p. 159 Send/read repeater tone frequency
01 see p. 159 Send/read tone squelch frequency
1C 00 00 T
ransceiver's condition (RX)
01 T
ransceiver's condition (TX)
01 00 Antenna tuner OFF (through)
01 Antenna tuner ON
02 T
uning
1E 00
Read number of available TX frequency band
01 see p. 159 Read TX band edge frequencies
02 Read number of user-set TX frequency band
03 see p. 159
Send/read user-set TX band edge frequencies
156
12
CONTROL COMMAND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Data content description
• Operating frequency
Command : 00, 03, 05
q
XX X X X
w e
X
r t
XX 00
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0
(Fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0
(Fixed)
• Operating mode
Command : 01, 04, 06
q
XX X X
w
q Operating mode w Filter setting
00: LSB 05: FM 01: FIL1
01: USB 07: CW-R 02: FIL2
02: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL3
03: CW 12: PSK
04: RTTY 13: PSK-R
Filter setting (w) can be skipped with command 01
and 06. In that case, “FIL1” is selected with command
01 and the default filter setting of the operating mode
is selected with command 06, automatically.
• Memory keyer contents
Command : 1A 02
X
q: Channel data
01： M1
02： M2
03： M3
04： M4
w–&1: Text data
X X X
……
X X
• Character’s code
Character ASCII code Description
0–9 30–39 Numerals
A–Z 41–5A Alphabet
ical characters
space 20 Word space
/ 2F Symbol
? 3F Symbol
, 2C Symbol
. 2E Symbol
@ 40 Symbol
^ 5E
e.g., to send BT, enter ^BT
2A Inserts contest number (can be
used for 1 channel only)
• Band stacking register
Command : 1A 01
q
XX X X
w
q Frequency band code
Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz)
01 1.8 1.800000– 1.999999
02 3.5 3.400000– 4.099999
03 7 6.900000– 7.499999
04 10 9.900000–10.499999
05 14 13.900000–14.499999
06 18 17.900000–18.499999
07 21 20.900000–21.499999
08 24 24.400000–25.099999
09 28 28.000000–29.999999
10 50 50.000000–54.000000
11 GENE Other than above
w Register code
Code Registered No.
01 1 (latest)
02 2
03 3 (oldest)
For example, when reading the oldest contents in the
21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.
When sending the contents, the following code should
be added after code w.
e−u i, o !0 !1−!3 !4−!6
X X ... X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X
q, w
e–u Operating frequency setting
See “• Operating frequency.”
i, o Oper
ating mode setting
See “• Operating mode.”
!0 Data mode sett
ing
1 byte data (XX)
X X
!0
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3
!1–!3 Repeater tone frequency setting
!4–!6
Tone squelch frequency setting
See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch setting.”
• Clock 2 offset time setting
Command : 1A 05 0056
X
Shift direction
00: + (plus)
01: − (minus)
Offset time
0000−2400
X X X XX
157
12
CONTROL COMMAND
• Offset frequency setting
Command : 1A 05 0065, 0066, 0072
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–9
†
1 MHz digit: 0–9
Direction:
00=+ direction
01=– direction
q
0X X X X XX
w e
0
r*
*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.
†
Transverter offset only; Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.
• Codes for memory name, opening
message and CLOCK2 name contents
To send or read the desired memory name settings,
the character codes, instructed codes for memory
keyer contents, and follows are used.
• Character’s code— Alphabetical characters
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
a–z 61–7A — —
• Character’s code— Symbols
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25
& 26 ¥ 5C
? 3F ” 22
’ 27 ` 60
+ 2B – 2D
: 3A ; 3B
= 3D < 3C
> 3E ( 28
) 29 [ 5B
] 5D { 7B
} 7D | 7C
_ 5F – 7E
@ 40
Command Set item/Available characters
1A00
Memory name
All char
acters are available.
1A05 0052
Open
ing message
Capital letters, numerals, some symbols (− /
. @) and space are available.
1A05 0057
CLOCK 2 name
C
apital letters, small letters, numerals,
some symbols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ /
. , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _
–
@) and space are
a
vailable.
• Color setting
Command : 1A 05 0106, 0107, 0140, 0149, 0150,
0151, 0152, 0154, 0159, 0160,
0161, 0162
q
0 X X X 0 X X X 0 X X X
w e r t y
R (Red)
0000–0255
G (Green)
0000–0255
B (Blue)
0000–0255
• Bandscope edge frequency setting
Command : 1A 05 0115, 0116, 0117, 0118, 0119,
0120, 0121, 0122, 0123, 0124,
0125, 0126
1 kHz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
10 MHz: 0–6
1 MHz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
10 MHz: 0–6
1 MHz: 0–9
q
X X X X X X X X X X X X
w e r t y
Lower edge Higher edge
• Data mode with filter width setting
Command : 1A 06
q
X X X X
w
00=Data mode OFF
01=FIL1
02=FIL2
03=FIL3
00=Data mode OFF
01=Data mode 1 (D1)
02=Data mode 2 (D2)
03=Data mode 3 (D3)
158
12
CONTROL COMMAND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
D Data content description (continued)
• Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency
setting
Command : 1B 00, 1B 01
100Hz digit: 0–2
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
0.1 Hz digit: 0–9
Fixed digit: 0*
Fixed digit: 0*
q*
00 X X X
w e
X
*Not necessary when setting a frequency.
• Band edge frequency setting
Command 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03
q
X X X
w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2
X X X X X X X X X 2 D X X X X X X X X X X
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1 MHz digit: 0–9
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)
Separator (fixed)
Lower edge Higher edge
Edge number*: 01–30
* Edge number setting is not necessary with com-
mand 02.
q, w Memory channel number
0000–0099
: Memory channel 0 to 99
0100 : Programmed scan edge P1
0101 : Programmed scan edge P2
e Select memory setting
00 : OFF
01 :
1
02
: 2
03 : 3
r–i Operating frequency setting
See
“• Operating frequency.”
o, !0 Operating mode setting
See “• Operating mode.”
!1 Data mode setting
1 byte data (XX)
X X
!1
0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3
!2–!4 Repeater tone frequency setting
!5–!7 Tone squelch frequency setting
See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch setting.”
!8–@7 Memory name setting
Up to 10 characters.
S
ee “• Codes for memory name, opening message
and Clock 2 name contents.”
159
12
CONTROL COMMAND
• Memory content setting
Command : 1A 00
X
e r−i o, !0 !1 !2−!4 !5−!7
X X X ... ...X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX XX X X X X X X X
q, w !8−@7
■ General
• Frequency coverage : (unit: MHz)
Receive
0.030–60.000*
1
*
2
Transmit
1.800–1.999*
2
, 3.500–3.999*
2
,
5.33050*
3
, 5.34650*
3
, 5.36650*
3
,
5.37150*
3
, 5.40350*
3
,
7.000–7.300*
2
, 10.100–10.150*
2
,
14.000–14.350*
2
, 18.068–18.168*
2
,
21.000–21.450*
2
, 24.890–24.990*
2
,
28.000–29.700*
2
,
50.000–54.000*
2
*
1
Some frequency bands are not guaranteed.
*
2
Depending on version. *
3
USA version only.
• Mode : USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK,
AM, FM
•
No. of memory channels : 101
(99 regular, 2 scan edges)
• Antenna connector type : SO-239 × 2 and phono jack
(RCA; 50 ø impedance)
• Temperature range :
0˚C to +50˚C (+32˚F to +122˚F)
• Frequency stability : Less than ±0.5 ppm 5 min. after
power ON.
(0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to
+122˚F)
• Frequency resolution : 1 Hz
• Power supply :
13.8 V DC ±15% (negative ground)
• Power consumption
Transmit : Max. power 23 A
Receive : Standby 3.0 A
Max.
audio 3.5 A
• Dimensions :
340(W) × 116(H) × 279.3(D) mm
(projections not included) 13
3
⁄8(W) × 4
9
⁄16(H) × 11(D) in
• Weight (approx.) : 10.0 kg; 22 lb
• ACC 1 connector : 8-pin DIN connector
• ACC 2 connector : 7-pin DIN connector
• CI-V connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (
1
⁄8″)
• Display : 5.8-inch
(diagonal)
TFT color LCD
■ Transmitter
• Output power (continuously adjustable)
SSB/CW/RTTY/FM : Less than 2 to 100 W
AM : Less than 1 to 30 W
• Modulation system
SSB : Digital PSN modulation
AM : Digital Low power modulation
FM
: Digital Phase modulation
• Spurious emission
HF bands : Less than –50 dB
50 MHz band : Less than –63 dB
• Carrier suppression : More than 40 dB
• Unwanted sideband : More than 55 dB
suppression
• ∂TX v
ariable range : ±9.999 kHz
• Microphone connector : 8-pin connector
(600 ø)
• ELEC-KEY connector :
3-conductor 6.35(d) mm
(
1
⁄4″)
• KEY connector :
3-conductor 6.35(d) mm
(
1
⁄4″)
• SEND connector : Phono jack
(RCA)
• ALC connector : Phono jack (RCA)
■ Receiver
• Receive system : Double superheterodyne
system
• Inter
mediate frequencies
1st : 64.455 MHz
2nd
: 36 kHz
• Sensitivity (typical)
SSB, CW, RTTY : 0.15 µV
(1.80–29.99 MHz)*
1
(10 dB S/N) BW=2.4 kHz 0.12 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*
2
AM (10 dB S/N) : 6.3 µV (0.1–1.799 MHz)*
1
BW=6 kHz 2 µV (1.80–29.99 MHz)*
1
1.6 µV
(50.0–54.0 MHz)*
2
FM (12 dB SINAD) : 0.5 µV (28.0–29.99 MHz)*
1
BW=15 kHz 0.3 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*
2
*
1
Pre-amp 1 is ON. *
2
Pre-amp 2 is ON.
• Squelch sensitivity
(Pre-amp: ON)
SSB : Less than 3.2 µV
FM : Less than 0.3 µV
• Selectivity
(IF filter shape is set to SHARP.)
SSB (BW: 2.4 kHz) : More than 2.4 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 3.8 kHz/–60 dB
CW (BW: 500 Hz) : More than 500 Hz/–6 dB
Less than 900 Hz/–60 dB
RTTY (BW: 350 Hz) : More than 350 Hz/–6 dB
Less than 650 Hz/–60 dB
AM (BW:
6 kHz) : More than 6.0 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB
FM (BW: 15 kHz) : More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB
Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB
•
Spurious and image : More than 70 dB
reject
ion ratio
(except IF through on 50 MHz band)
• AF output power : More than 2.0 W at 10%
(at 13.8 V DC) distortion with an 8 ø load
• RIT v
ariable range : ±9.999 kHz
• PHONES connector : 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (
1
⁄4″)
• External SP connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm
(
1
⁄8″)/8 ø
• DSP ANF attenuation : More than 30 dB
(w
ith 1 kHz single tone)
• DSP NR attenuation : More than 6 dB
(no
ise rejection in SSB)
■ Antenna tuner
• Matching impedance range
HF bands : 16.7 to 150 ø unbalanced
(Less than VSWR 3:1)
50 MHz band : 20 to 125 ø unbalanced
(Less than VSWR 2.5:1)
• Minimum operating input : 8 W (HF bands)
power 15 W (50MHz band)
• Tuning accuracy : VSWR 1.5:1 or less
• Insertion loss : Less than 1.0 dB
(after tuning at RF power 100W)
Spurious signals may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen
regardless of the transceiver’s state (Tx or Rx). They are gener-
ated i
n the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver mal-
function.
All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without
notice or obligation.
13
160
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
AH-4 hf automatic antenna tuner
Specially designed to tune a long wire
antenna for HF/50 MHz bands partic-
ularly i
n portable or mobile operation.
The “PTT tune” function provides sim-
ple operat
ion.
• Input power rating: 120 W
AH-2b antenna element
A 2.5 m long antenna ele-
ment for mobile operation
with the AH-4.
• Frequency coverage
7
–54 MHz band with the
AH-4
SM-20 desktop microphone
Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a
low cut function.
SM-50 desktop microphone
Flexible arm dynamic microphone
including [UP]/[DOWN] switches and
a low cut function.
SP-23 external speaker
4 audio filters; headphone jack; can
connect to 2 transceivers.
• Input impedance: 8 ø
• Max.
input power: 4 W
HM-36 hand microphone
Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/
[DOWN] switches.
CT-17 ci-v level converter unit
For remote transceiver control using a
personal computer equipped with an
RS-232C port. You can change fre-
q
uencies, operating mode, memory
channels, etc., via your computer.
IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER
Full-duty 1 kW linear amplifier including an automatic antenna tuner. Has auto-
matic tuning and band selection capability. Full break-in (QSK) operation is pos-
s
ible. The amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit are separated.
PS-126 dc power supply
• Output voltage : 13.8 V DC
• Max. output current : 25 A
161
13
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
■ Options
• MB-121 carrying handle
Convenient when carrying the transceiver.
The same as that attached with the transceiver.
■ General
The IC-7600’s firmware can be updated if desired. By
updating the firmware, new function(s) can be added
and the improvement of performance parameters can
be obtained.
Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 163) and ■ Firmware
update
(p. 164) for details
.
Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the
firmware if you have no PC.
■ Caution
CAUTION: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF
while updating the firmware.
You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when
the transceiver displays that rebooting is required.
If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power
failure occurs during updating, the transceiver firm-
ware will be corrupted and you will have to send the
transceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for
repair. This type of repair is out of warranty even if
the warranty period is still valid.
Recommendation!
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to
the USB-Memory before starting the firmware update
is recommended.
Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or
returned to default settings when the firmware update
is performed.
14
162
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7600_110.dat)
should be copied to the USB-Memory (in “IC-7600”
folder) using an available USB port (USB hub may
be required; purchased separately from your PC
dealer).
■ Preparation
D Firmware and firm utility
The latest firmware can be downloaded from the Icom
home page via the Internet. Access the following URL
to download the firm utility and the latest firmware.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.html
Information
The downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7600_110.dat)
should be copied to the USB-Memory (in “IC-7600”
folder)
using an available USB port (USB hub may be
required; purchased separately from your PC dealer)
.
D File downloading
q Access the following URL directly.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.html
w Click “Firmware Updates/Software Downloads” link
then click the firmware file link.
e
Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,
then click [AGREE].
r Cl
ick [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog.
t
Select the desired location in which you want to
save the firmware, then click [Save] in the dis-
played File Download dialog.
• File download starts.
y After download is completed, extract the file.
• The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in
“zip” format, respectively.
• When updating the transceiver using with the USB-
Memory, copy the extracted firmware (e.g. 7600_110.
dat) to the USB-Memory IC-7600 folder.
•
The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7600. (p. 143)
Click
Read carefully
Clic
k
Select the saving
location
Click
7600_110.dat
163
14
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
The transceiver indicates its firmware version infor-
mation after turning power ON if the opening mes-
sage screen indication capability is ON. (p. 127)
q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the “IC-
7600” folder of the USB-Memory.
• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7600.
w Insert the USB-Memory into the [USB] (A) connec-
tor on the front panel.
e Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
r Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen.
t Push [USB] (F-6) to select USB-Memory set
menu.
y Push and hold [FIRM UP] (F-3) for 1 sec.
u Read the displayed precaution carefully.
• Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to scroll the indication.
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6)
to cancel the firmware updating.
i After you read and understand all of the precau-
tions, push [OK] (F-5).
• [OK] (F-5) appears only following the precautions.
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6)
to cancel the firmware updating.
o Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the firmware
file, then push [FIRM UP] (F-4).
!0 Read the displayed precautions carefully.
!1 If you agree, push and hold [OK] (F-5) for 1 sec. to
start the firmware update.
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the firmware updating.
!2 While loading the firmware from the USB-Memory,
the dialog as at left is displayed.
F-1 F-2
F-5 F-6
EXIT/SET
USBSET CANCEL
DIR/FILE
OK
F-4
FIRM UP
F-3
FIRM UP
[USB] (A)
/ /
/ /
/
☞ Continues to the next page.
■ Firmware update
164
14
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
■ Firmware update (Continued)
!3 After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-
ceiver starts the update automatically and the dia-
log at right is displayed.
RWARNING: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF
at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution at left
is displayed.
!5 Read the precaution carefully, and then push
[OK] (F-5).
• Return to USB-Memory set menu.
!6 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-7600 power OFF,
then ON again.
!7 Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes
as at right appear in sequence.
RWARNING: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF
at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updat-
ing is completed and normal operation screen
appears.
165
14
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
INSTALLATION NOTES
For amateur base station installations it is recom-
mended that the forward clearance in front of the an-
tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effec-
tive Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height
below the antenna array can be determined in most
cases from the RF power at the antenna input termi-
nals.
As different exposure limits have been recommended
for different frequencies, a relative table shows a
guideline for installation considerations.
Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified
in terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are likely to fall
within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas
may be physically short in terms of electrical length
and that the installation will require some antenna
matching device which can create local, high intensity
magnetic fields. Analysis of such MF installations is
best considered in association with published guid-
ance
notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition
97-01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter
installations.
The EC recommended limits are almost identical to
the FCC specified ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables exist
that show pre-calculated safe distances for different
antenna types for different frequency bands. Further
information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.
• Typical amateur radio installation
Exposure
distance assumes that the predominant ra-
diation pattern is forward and that radiation vertically
downwards is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is
equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every
gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed
to be beneath the antenna array and have a typical
height of 1.8 m.
The figures assume the worst case emission of a
constant carrier.
For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power
density limits have been recommended:
10–50 MHz 2 W/sq m
Vertical clearance by EIRP output
1 Watts 2.1 m
10 Watts 2.8 m
25 Watts 3.4 m
100 Watts 5 m
1000 Watts 12 m
Forward clearance by EIRP output
100 Watts 2 m
1000 Watts 6.5 m
10,000 Watts 20 m
100,000 Watts 65 m
In all cases any possible risk depends on the trans-
mitter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-
mendation limits are specified as an average during 6
minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long
periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a
timer circuit automatically cuts off the transmitter after
1–2 minutes etc.
Similarly some modes of transmission, SSB, CW, AM
etc. have a lower ‘average’ output power and the as-
sessed risk is even lower.
Versions of the IC-7600 which display the
“CE” symbol on the serial number seal,
comply with the essential requirements of
the European Radio and Telecommunica-
tion Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC.
This warning symbol indicates that this
equipment operates in non-harmonised
frequency bands and/or may be subject to
lic
ensing conditions in the country of use.
Be sure to check that you have the correct
version of this radio or the correct pro-
gramming of this radio, to comply with na-
tional licensing requirement.
• List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)
Country Codes Country Codes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Austria
Belgium
Bulgaria
Croatia
Czech Republic
Cyprus
Denmark
Estonia
Finland
France
Germany
Greece
Hungary
Iceland
Ireland
Italy
Latvia
AT
BE
BG
HR
CZ
CY
DK
EE
FI
FR
DE
GR
HU
IS
IE
IT
LV
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Liechtenstein
Lithuania
Luxembourg
Malta
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Romania
Slovakia
Slovenia
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Turkey
United Kingdom
LI
LT
LU
MT
NL
NO
PL
PT
RO
SK
SI
ES
SE
CH
TR
GB
15
166
CE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
DECLARATION
OF CONFORMITY
We Icom Inc. Japan
1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku
Osaka 547-0003, Japan
Kind of equipment:
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER
Type-designation: iC-
7600
Signature
Authorized representative name
Place and date of issue
Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the
essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test
Suite measurements have been performed.
Version (where applicable):
This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised
standards, specifications or documents:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Düsseldorf
23rd
Jan.
2009
Y. Furukawa
General Manager
EN 301 489-1 v1.6.1 (September 2005)
EN 301 489-15 v1.2.1 (August 2002)
EN 301 783-2 v1.1.1 (September 2000)
EN 60950-1 : 2001
167
15
CE
168
MEMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
169
MEMO
170
MEMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
171
MEMO
172
MEMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan
A-6722H-1EX
Printed in Japan
© 2009 Icom Inc.
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
IC-7600 #10
(France)
< Intended Country of Use >
AT
FI
IT
PL
GB
RO
BE
FR
LV
PT
IS
TR
CY
DE
LT
SK
LI
HR
CZ
GR
LU
SI
NO
DK
HU
MT
ES
CH
EE
IE
NL
SE
BG
IC-7600 #03
(Europe)
IC-7600 #04
(Europe-1)
IC-7600 #05
(Spain)
IC-7600 #09
(Italy)
… 33 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Icom-IC-7600

  • Beste medeforumleden,

    Kan iemand mij vertellen hoe ik een split frequentie in een geheugenkanaal kan vastleggen? Bijv. 14.105 rx en 14.080 tx. Dit is een voorbeeld van 2 frequenties, niet echt wat ik wil dus.

    Bvbd.
    73’s PA0LDE Gesteld op 28-3-2020 om 21:59

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Icom IC-7600 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Icom IC-7600 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 14,33 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info